SSF_UM_um.

book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

3PECTRUM3URVEY&IELD

5SERlS-ANUAL
SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM
SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Spectrum Survey Field

User’s Manual

Part Number 7010-0945

Rev C

All contents in this manual are copyrighted by Sokkia. All rights reserved.
The information contained herein may not be used, accessed, copied, stored,
displayed, sold, modified, published, or distributed, or otherwise reproduced
without express written consent from Sokkia.
SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

ECO#4032
SSF_UM_um.book Page i Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

TOC

Table of Contents
Chapter 1
Introduction .......................................................... 1-1
SSF on Controller ............................................................ 1-2
System Requirements ................................................ 1-2
ActiveSync ................................................................ 1-2
Installing SSF ............................................................ 1-3
Uninstalling SSF ....................................................... 1-11
Starting SSF ..................................................................... 1-11
Demo Mode ..................................................................... 1-12

Chapter 2
Getting Started ..................................................... 2-1
Connections ..................................................................... 2-2
Transferring Job Files ...................................................... 2-4
Opening Old Jobs ............................................................ 2-4
Automatic Job Backups ................................................... 2-6
Main Screen ..................................................................... 2-7
Title Bar .................................................................... 2-8
Main Icons ................................................................. 2-9
Viewing Port Traffic ........................................................ 2-10
Accessing Help Files ....................................................... 2-12
Before Surveying ............................................................. 2-13

Chapter 3
Preparation ........................................................... 3-1
GPS Receiver Setup ......................................................... 3-1
Total Station (TS) Setup .................................................. 3-2
Level Setup ...................................................................... 3-3

Chapter 4
Creating a New Job .............................................. 4-1
Creating a GPS+ Configuration ....................................... 4-3

P/N 7010-0945 i
SSF_UM_um.book Page ii Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Table of Contents

RTK Survey Configuration ........................................ 4-6

NMEA Output Configuration ............................. 4-24
Laser Configuration ............................................ 4-26
mmGPS+ Configuration ..................................... 4-27
PP Enabled RTK Survey Configuration ............. 4-28
Network RTK Survey Configuration ......................... 4-31
NTRIP Internet Configuration ............................ 4-33
PP Enabled Network RTK Survey Configuration 4-42
Network DGPS .......................................................... 4-43
RT DGPS Survey Configuration ............................... 4-43
PP Enabled RT DGPS Survey Configuration ..... 4-48
PP Kinematic and PP DGPS Survey Configurations 4-49
PP Static Survey Configuration ................................. 4-52
Creating Optical Configuration ........................................ 4-56
Configuration Setup ......................................................... 4-65
Coordinate System ..................................................... 4-65
Adding a Projection ............................................. 4-67
Adding a Custom Datum ..................................... 4-70
Adding a Geoid File ............................................ 4-72
Grid / Ground Transformation ............................ 4-73
Units ........................................................................... 4-76
Display ....................................................................... 4-78
Alarms ........................................................................ 4-78
Connections ............................................................... 4-79
Setting Automatic Import of Localization and
Code Library ........................................................... 4-80
Code Settings and Prompts ........................................ 4-81
Customizing Menus ................................................... 4-84
Setting Background Images ....................................... 4-84
Global Settings ........................................................... 4-86
Backup Jobs ............................................................... 4-86
Configuring Stake Reports ........................................ 4-88

Chapter 5
Importing and Exporting Data ............................ 5-1
Importing Data ................................................................. 5-1
Import from Job ......................................................... 5-1
Import from Device ................................................... 5-6

ii Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page iii Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Table of Contents

Import from File ........................................................ 5-7

Points from Text File Formats ............................ 5-7
Points from AutoCAD DXF and AutoCAD 2000
Drawing Files .................................................. 5-10
Points from ESRI Shape ..................................... 5-11
Points from TDS Format .................................... 5-12
Importing Lines .................................................. 5-12
Importing Localization ....................................... 5-13
Importing Multiple Data Types .......................... 5-13
Importing Code Library ...................................... 5-14
Importing Roads ................................................. 5-14
Exporting Data ................................................................. 5-15
Export to Job ............................................................. 5-15
Export to Device ....................................................... 5-19
Export to File ............................................................. 5-20
Points to Topcon Text Custom ........................... 5-21
Points to Text Custom Report, Sokkia SDR and
Topcon 3DMC Project .................................... 5-24
Points to AutoCAD DXF and AutoCAD 2000
Drawing ........................................................... 5-25
Points to ESRI Shape Format ............................. 5-27
Points to TDS ...................................................... 5-28
Exporting Lines .................................................. 5-28
Exporting Raw Data ........................................... 5-30
Raw Data To Topcon FC-6/GTS-7 and GTS-7+ 5-31
Raw Data To SurvCE ......................................... 5-32
Raw Data To Sokkia SDR33 .............................. 5-33
Exporting Localization ....................................... 5-34
Exporting Job History ......................................... 5-34
Exporting TINs ................................................... 5-34
Exporting Multiple Data ..................................... 5-34
Exporting GPS Sessions to the Receiver .................. 5-35

Chapter 6
Storing Data .......................................................... 6-1
Editing Points ................................................................... 6-1
Storing Points ................................................................... 6-7
Stand-alone Points ..................................................... 6-7

P/N 7010-0945 iii

SSF_UM_um.book Page iv Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Table of Contents

Linework .................................................................... 6-8

Linework Package ..................................................... 6-9
Area ............................................................................ 6-11
Editing Codes ................................................................... 6-12
Editing Point Lists ............................................................ 6-14
Editing Layers .................................................................. 6-16
Editing Linework .............................................................. 6-19
Editing Areas .................................................................... 6-21
Operating Raw Data ......................................................... 6-23
Editing GPS Sessions ....................................................... 6-25
Editing Objects from the Main Map ................................ 6-27

Chapter 7
Designing Roads ................................................. 7-1
Editing Roads ................................................................... 7-2
Editing Horizontal Alignments ........................................ 7-5
Adding a Line ............................................................ 7-7
Adding a Curve .......................................................... 7-8
Adding a Spiral .......................................................... 7-10
Intersection Point ....................................................... 7-11
Editing Vertical Alignments ............................................. 7-12
Adding Vertical Grade ............................................... 7-17
Adding a Curve .......................................................... 7-17
Adding Long Sections ............................................... 7-18
Editing X-Sect Templates ................................................ 7-19
Editing Cross-Section Sets ............................................... 7-21
Editing String Sets ............................................................ 7-23
Editing Roads from the Main Map ................................... 7-26

Chapter 8
Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field ............. 8-1
Performing GPS+ Surveys ............................................... 8-1
Localization ............................................................... 8-2
Starting the Base ........................................................ 8-7
Starting Base with Autonomous Position ........... 8-8
Config Radio ....................................................... 8-9
Configure RE-S1 Repeater .................................. 8-11
Multi Base ........................................................... 8-11

iv Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page v Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Table of Contents

Status of GPS+ Survey .............................................. 8-14

Setting Up Survey With Known Points .................... 8-14
Initializing mmGPS+ ................................................ 8-16
Transmitter Calibration ....................................... 8-16
Sensor Initialization ............................................ 8-18
Performing a Topo Survey ........................................ 8-20
OmniSTAR Status .............................................. 8-24
Beacon Status ..................................................... 8-25
Config BR-1 ....................................................... 8-26
mmGPS+ Options ............................................... 8-27
Performing an Auto Topo Survey ............................. 8-28
Cross-Section ............................................................ 8-30
Find Station/Chainage ............................................... 8-32
Tape Dimension ........................................................ 8-33
Performing a Static Survey ....................................... 8-35
Performing Total Station Surveys ................................... 8-36
Backsight Survey ...................................................... 8-36
Sideshot (Topo) Survey ............................................. 8-38
Measuring Sideshot Sets ........................................... 8-41
Angle/Distance Sets .................................................. 8-42
Resection ................................................................... 8-42
Resection from GPS Points ................................ 8-45
Remote Benchmarks ................................................. 8-48
Remote Control ......................................................... 8-50
Cross-Section ............................................................ 8-51
Find Station ............................................................... 8-53
Tape Dimension ........................................................ 8-55
Missing Line .............................................................. 8-56
Auto Topo ................................................................. 8-57
Scanning .................................................................... 8-59
Scanning with Images ......................................... 8-60
Scanning Without Images ................................... 8-67
Monitor ...................................................................... 8-69
Performing Level Surveys ............................................... 8-71
Two Peg Test ............................................................. 8-72
Level Run .................................................................. 8-74

P/N 7010-0945 v
SSF_UM_um.book Page vi Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Table of Contents

Chapter 9
Staking Out ........................................................... 9-1
Stakeout a Point ................................................................ 9-2
GPS Stakeout ............................................................. 9-5
TS Stakeout ................................................................ 9-5
Stakeout Views .......................................................... 9-7
Stakeout Values ......................................................... 9-9
Changing Rod Height ................................................ 9-10
Store Point Information ............................................. 9-10
Design Offsets ........................................................... 9-12
Stakeout a Point in Direction ........................................... 9-12
Stakeout a Point List ........................................................ 9-14
Stakeout a Line ................................................................. 9-15
Stakeout a Curve .............................................................. 9-17
Stakeout Offsets ............................................................... 9-19
Line & Offset ............................................................ 9-19
Three Point Curve & Offsets ..................................... 9-22
Intersection & Offsets ................................................ 9-25
Curve & Offsets ......................................................... 9-27
Spiral & Offsets ......................................................... 9-29
Stakeout Roads ................................................................. 9-30
Stakeout Slope .................................................................. 9-33
Stakeout Real Time Road ................................................. 9-39
Stakeout DTM .................................................................. 9-42
Stakeout Linework ........................................................... 9-44
Level Stakeout .................................................................. 9-47
DL Staking a Point ..................................................... 9-47
DL Staking Point List ................................................ 9-48
DL Staking Elevation ................................................ 9-49

Chapter 10
COGO .................................................................... 10-1
Inverse .............................................................................. 10-1
Two-Point Inverse ..................................................... 10-1
Inverse Point to Points List ........................................ 10-2
Inverse Point to Line .................................................. 10-3
Point in Direction ............................................................. 10-4
Intersection ....................................................................... 10-5

vi Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page vii Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Table of Contents

Calculator ......................................................................... 10-6

Curve Solutions ............................................................... 10-7
Curve ......................................................................... 10-8
PI & Tangents ........................................................... 10-8
Three Pt Curve .......................................................... 10-9
Radius & Points ......................................................... 10-10
Area .................................................................................. 10-11
By Points ................................................................... 10-11
Hinge ......................................................................... 10-12
Line ........................................................................... 10-14
Corner Angle ................................................................... 10-16
Offsets .............................................................................. 10-17
Line Offset ................................................................ 10-17
Curve Offset .............................................................. 10-18
Road Offset ............................................................... 10-19
Adjust Points .................................................................... 10-20
Rotate ........................................................................ 10-20
Translate .................................................................... 10-21
Scale .......................................................................... 10-22
2D Transform ............................................................ 10-23
Traverse Adjustment ................................................. 10-24
Traverse Calculation ........................................................ 10-26
DTM Volume ................................................................... 10-27

Chapter 11
mmGPS Operations ............................................. A-1
Resection .......................................................................... A-1
Field Calibration .............................................................. A-8
mmGPS Options .............................................................. A-13

P/N 7010-0945 vii

SSF_UM_um.book Page viii Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Table of Contents

Notes:

viii Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page ix Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Preface

Preface
Thank you for purchasing this Sokkia product. The materials
available in this Manual (the “Manual”) have been prepared by
Sokkia for owners of Sokkia products, and are designed to assist
owners with the use of the receiver and its use is subject to these
terms and conditions (the “Terms and Conditions”).

NOTICE Please read these Terms and Conditions carefully.

Terms and Conditions

USE This product is designed to be used by a professional. The user
should have a good knowledge of the safe use of the product and
implement the types of safety procedures recommended by the local
government protection agency for both private use and commercial
job sites.
COPYRIGHT All information contained in this Manual is the
intellectual property of, and copyrighted material of Sokkia. All
rights are reserved. Do not use, access, copy, store, display, create
derivative works of, sell, modify, publish, distribute, or allow any
third party access to, any graphics, content, information or data in this
Manual without Sokkia’s express written consent and may only use
such information for the care and operation of your receiver. The
information and data in this Manual are a valuable asset of Sokkia
and are developed by the expenditure of considerable work, time and
money, and are the result of original selection, coordination and
arrangement by Sokkia.

P/N 7010-0945 ix
SSF_UM_um.book Page x Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Preface

TRADEMARKS GRX1™, Spectrum Survey Office™, Spectrum

Link™, Spectrum Survey Field™, SHC2500™, and GRX Utility™
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sokkia. Windows® is a
registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. The Bluetooth® word
mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Sokkia is used under license. Other product and company
names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective
owners.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY EXCEPT FOR ANY
WARRANTIES IN AN APPENDIX OR A WARRANTY CARD
ACCOMPANYING THE PRODUCT, THIS MANUAL AND THE
RECEIVER ARE PROVIDED “AS-IS.” THERE ARE NO OTHER
WARRANTIES. SOKKIA DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE. SOKKIA AND ITS
DISTRIBUTORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR
EDITORIAL ERRORS OR OMISSIONS CONTAINED HEREIN;
NOR FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
RESULTING FROM THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE OR
USE OF THIS MATERIAL OR THE RECEIVER. SUCH
DISCLAIMED DAMAGES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED
TO LOSS OF TIME, LOSS OR DESTRUCTION OF DATA, LOSS
OF PROFIT, SAVINGS OR REVENUE, OR LOSS OF THE
PRODUCT’S USE. IN ADDITION SOKKIA IS NOT
RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OR COSTS
INCURRED IN CONNECTION WITH OBTAINING
SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS OR SOFTWARE, CLAIMS BY
OTHERS, INCONVENIENCE, OR ANY OTHER COSTS. IN ANY
EVENT, SOKKIA SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
DAMAGES OR OTHERWISE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER
PERSON OR ENTITY IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE
FOR THE RECEIVER.
LICENSE AGREEMENT Use of any computer programs or software
supplied by Sokkia or downloaded from a Sokkia website (the
“Software”) in connection with the receiver constitutes acceptance of
these Terms and Conditions in this Manual and an agreement to abide
by these Terms and Conditions. The user is granted a personal, non-

x Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page xi Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Terms and Conditions

exclusive, non-transferable license to use such Software under the

terms stated herein and in any case only with a single receiver or
single computer. You may not assign or transfer the Software or this
license without the express written consent of Sokkia. This license is
effective until terminated. You may terminate the license at any time
by destroying the Software and Manual. Sokkia may terminate the
license if you fail to comply with any of the Terms or Conditions.
You agree to destroy the Software and manual upon termination of
your use of the receiver. All ownership, copyright and other
intellectual property rights in and to the Software belong to Sokkia. If
these license terms are not acceptable, return any unused software and
manual.
CONFIDENTIALITY This Manual, its contents and the Software
(collectively, the “Confidential Information”) are the confidential and
proprietary information of Sokkia. You agree to treat Sokkia’s
Confidential Information with a degree of care no less stringent that the
degree of care you would use in safeguarding your own most valuable
trade secrets. Nothing in this paragraph shall restrict you from
disclosing Confidential Information to your employees as may be
necessary or appropriate to operate or care for the receiver. Such
employees must also keep the Confidentiality Information confidential.
In the event you become legally compelled to disclose any of the
Confidential Information, you shall give Sokkia immediate notice so
that it may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy.
WEBSITE; OTHER STATEMENTS No statement contained at the
Sokkia website (or any other website) or in any other advertisements
or Sokkia literature or made by an employee or independent
contractor of Sokkia modifies these Terms and Conditions (including
the Software license, warranty and limitation of liability).
SAFETY Improper use of the receiver can lead to injury to persons or
property and/or malfunction of the product. The receiver should only
be repaired by authorized Sokkia warranty service centers. Users
should review and heed the safety warnings in an Appendix.
MISCELLANEOUS The above Terms and Conditions may be
amended, modified, superseded, or canceled, at any time by Sokkia.
The above Terms and Conditions will be governed by, and construed

P/N 7010-0945 xi
SSF_UM_um.book Page xii Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Preface

in accordance with, the laws of the State of California, without

reference to conflict of laws.

Manual Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions:
Example Description

File Exit Click the File menu, and click Exit.

Connection Indicates the name of a dialog box or screen.
Frequency Indicates a field on a dialog box or screen, or a tab
within a dialog box or screen.
Enter Press or click the button or key labeled Enter.

Supplementary information that can help you

TIP configure, maintain, or set up a system.

Supplementary information that can have an affect

NOTICE on system operation, system performance,
measurements, or personal safety.

xii Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page xiii Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

What’s New

What’s New with

Spectrum Survey Field
The chapter briefly describes new features and functions for version 8
of SSF.
Connection Settings
Connection settings are now available on
selecting observation mode. For GPS
mode you are able select the Base or
Rover receiver to work.

Default Code Library

Default Code Library is now installed
and set to the Global Code library.

Moving Arrow on Map

Moving arrow now denotes the current
position on the map.

P/N 7010-0945 xiii

SSF_UM_um.book Page xiv Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

What’s New with Spectrum Survey Field

Sokkia Equipment
Sokkia equipment is now supported.

Canopy Environment
Setting the receiver in “forest” mode is
now supported.

Automatic Start UHF Radio

Automatic start UHF radio is added to
Start Base. Selecting frequency is now
available on the status string.

PCC mode
Satel PCC mode is optional now.

xiv Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page xv Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

What’s New with Spectrum Survey Field

Web Address
NTRIP connection can now be set up
based on web address instead of IP
address for controller-side Internet
connection.

Network Connections
Auto-connection to Network is optional,
and auto-disconnection from Mount
Point on disconnecting from receiver is
now added.

GR-5 Receiver
Topcon GR-5 receiver is now supported.

DL-502/503 Digital Levels

Topcon digital levels DL-502 and DL-
503 are now supported.

P/N 7010-0945 xv
SSF_UM_um.book Page xvi Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

What’s New with Spectrum Survey Field

Localization
Localizations based on user-selected
projection/datum are now supported.

SurvCE Code Library

SurvCE code library is now supported for
import/export.

Text Size in DXF/DWG

Text size can now be manually/
automatically set in exported DXF/DWG
files.

TP3 Import/Export
Topcon machine control project file is
now supported for import/export.

xvi Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page xvii Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

What’s New with Spectrum Survey Field

High/Low Positions
High/low positions can be computed now
for the Grade and Station option in
Vertical Alignment.

Named Segments
The segments are stored now as Named
segment instead of a Code being created
for each segment.

String Sets and Working Corridor

String Sets as an alternative method for
defining a road surface, and Working
corridor are now supported.

Stake Reports
Stake reports are now supported to be set
for stakeout.

P/N 7010-0945 xvii

SSF_UM_um.book Page xviii Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

What’s New with Spectrum Survey Field

Lineworks From Map

Ability to stakeout Linework created
from Map, and to stop at transition points
is now supported.

Lineworks By Code Strings

Selecting Lineworks for stakeout by
either Line or Code/String is now
supported.

Real-Time Stakeout of Lineworks

Ability to do Station (interval) or Real-
Time stakeout of a linework, and ability
to add horizontal and vertical offsets are
now supported.

User Definable Labels

Editing any of four labels for showing
any live value on all graphical views for
stakeout is now supported. Just click on
one of them to change.

xviii Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page xix Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

What’s New with Spectrum Survey Field

Cross Section Segment Highlighted

The cross section segment at the rod
position is highlighted, and cut/fill and
offset to two segment points are reported.

Vertical/Perpendicular Offsets
Vertical or perpendicular offset can now
be defined for Intersect Left/Right.

Store Point Information

Store point information now include
Stake, Code and Note for setting
properties of the staked point to be
stored, and Design for setting properties
of the calculated design point, when
applicable.

Store Catch /Offset Point

When storing the Catch Point / Offset
Point, an offset can be selected on the
Data tab. Also references can be set for
additional repoting options.

P/N 7010-0945 xix

SSF_UM_um.book Page xx Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

What’s New with Spectrum Survey Field

Linework for COGO Area

Selecting Linework/Area is now
supported for computing Area task.

Volumes
Now two DTM files can be selected to
get a volume report.

xx Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 1

Introduction
Spectrum Survey Field (SSF) is Sokkia’s survey software available
for hand-held controllers. SSF is used for surveying, common layout,
and GIS purposes including:
• Field data collection with Sokkia and Topcon GPS receivers;
Sokkia, Topcon, Nikon and Leica Total Stations; and Sokkia and
Topcon Digital Levels
• Roads design to create cross section templates, horizontal, and
vertical alignments
• Stakeout designed objects
• Data conversions to a variety of file formats
• COGO calculations
SSF installs on hand-held controllers that run Windows® CE or
Windows Mobile operating system, such as such as Sokkia’s
SHC2500, Topcon’s FC-25, FC-250, FC-2200, FC-2500, FC-200 and
the integrated controller of GMS-2, GMS-2 Pro and GRS-1.
Spectrum Link PC software is included on CD with SSF providing
data integration with your current office software.
Also, SSF for Microsoft Windows compatible PCs with Windows®
XP OS or higher is available from the Sokkia website. It will operate
in a ‘demonstration’ mode, allowing 25 points to be added to a job.
To fully activate, a separate license must be purchased.
The given manual describes features of SSF ver.8 installed on a
Topcon field controller using screenshots mainly obtained with the
help of FC-200 controller.

P/N 7010-0945 1-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Introduction

SSF on Controller
The SSF setup file will first be loaded onto a computer. To install SSF
onto the controller, use ActiveSync and a connection between the
computer and the controller receiving the software download.

Microsoft® ActiveSync® must be installed on the

NOTICE
computer before installing SSF.

ActiveSync is available for free from the Microsoft

TIP T website. (For downloading, access the website
http://www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/).

System Requirements
Minimum system requirements for controllers include:
1. Display 240x320 or 320x240 pixels,
2. 64 MB RAM and 50 MB flash disk space (internal),
3. Windows® CE.NET Version 4.2 or higher, or Windows®
Mobile Version 6.2 or higher.

ActiveSync
Using ActiveSync, the controller can exchange data to a computer via
USB cable.
1. Install ActiveSync in the computer and turn on the controller.
2. Connect the controller to the computer with the USB cable.
3. The controller will give the prompt, Connecting to Host.
4. The computer will prompt to set up a partnership or set up as a
guest. Select the desired type of connection.
5. Once a connection has been established, the ActiveSync
window will display on the computer.

1-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

SSF on Controller

Installing SSF
Use the steps below to install SSF onto the computer and controller.
1. Download or copy an appropriate for your controller SSF
installation file to the computer.
2. Connect the controller to the computer by USB/Serial Cable
using Active Sync.
3. On the controller, move the slider bar in Control Panel/System/
Memory to the right to allow more storage memory for copied
files. Leave only about 2MB for the program memory.
4. Click SSF installation file on your computer.
The Welcome screen displays (Figure 1-1).

Figure 1-1. Welcome Screen

5. After detecting device information, if SSF is already installed,

the Maintenance wizard prompts to remove the previous
installation of SSF from your computer (Figure 1-2 on page 1-
4). Click OK.

NOTICE SSF will NOT be removed from the controller.

P/N 7010-0945 1-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Introduction

Figure 1-2. Confirm Uninstall

6. Once the previous SSF installation is removed, double click

SSF installation file again.
7. Review the License Agreement (Figure 1-3).

Figure 1-3. License Agreement

• To accept the terms and continue, click the “I accept...” radio

button and click Next.
• To decline the terms and quit installing SSF, click the “I do not
accept...” radio button and click Next. The InstallShield Wizard
will close and SSF will not install onto the computer or
controller.

1-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

SSF on Controller

8. Select the features to install (Figure 1-4) and click Next.

Figure 1-4. Select Features to Install

The following files can be installed on the controller during SSF

installation by making the appropriate file selection:
• Projection Files: UK OSTN02, Belgium, Netherlands
RDNAPTRANS(TM), Netherlands RDNAPTRANS(TM)-2004,
Netherlands RDNAPTRANS(TM)-2008, Hungary VITEL,
Hungary VITEL 2009, Czech, Romania. These files are copied
into the Geo/TabProjections folder under the SSF folder on the
controller.
• Geoid Files: UK, Netherlands, Canada (CGG2000 East/West/
North; HT2_0), Dutch 2004, Dutch 2008, Belgium, France
(French, French Corsica), Northern Ireland, Spain
(Catalonia(WGS84), Catalonia(ED50)), Hungary, Lithuania,
Latvia, Republic of Ireland, Portugal. These files are copied into
the Geoids folder under the SSF folder on the controller.
• Import/Export: Support for Import DWG2008 and for Import
Project file associated with imported Shape File.
9. Then the device information will be detected. If the controller is
disconnected from the computer, the following message
displays.

P/N 7010-0945 1-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Introduction

Figure 1-5. Unable to connect to the controller

10. The wizard will begin the installation process. Click Install to
begin (Figure 1-6).

Figure 1-6. Select Device

During the setup process, installation files are copied to the

appropriate directories in your computer for ActiveSync to access.
Once finished, SSF installation accesses ActiveSync and launches
Add/Remove Programs to install SSF in the controller (Figure 1-7).

1-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

SSF on Controller

Figure 1-7. Setup Status

ActiveSync starts the Add/Remove Programs process, which

automatically detects an available installation and attempts to install
it on the controller (Figure 1-8 on page 1-7).

Figure 1-8. Data Retrieved From Mobile Device

11. Click Yes at the Installing Applications screen (Figure 1-9) to

install SSF into the default directory in the controller.

Figure 1-9. Installing SSF

12. If the controller main memory does not have space available to
copy the installation file, a prompt will display to select other
destination media (Figure 1-10).

P/N 7010-0945 1-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Introduction

Figure 1-10. Select Destination Media

Not to change the destination media, you can try

NOTICE moving the slider bar in Control Panel/System/
Memory to the most right position.

13. ActiveSync will copy the installation file (CAB file) from the
computer to the controller.

Figure 1-11. Installation Complete

14. Once the transfer completes, the PC installation program first

copies the SSF program files into the controller. Follow the
steps indicated on the controller’s screen to complete SSF
installation.

Figure 1-12. Check Mobile Device

1-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

SSF on Controller

15. After this step, the following message is displayed on the PC

screen indicating that the selected features will be installed on
the controller (Figure 1-13).

Figure 1-13. Install Remaining Files

16. Click OK to this message after the progress bar on the

controller screen (Figure 1-14) disappears.

Figure 1-14. Copy SSF Files to Controller

The progress bar indicates that the SSF program files are being
copied to the controller prior to copying the selected feature files.
17. After clicking OK to the message on the PC screen
(Figure 1-13), the installation program starts copying the
selected feature files into corresponding folders under the SSF
folder on the controller.
This will take a few minutes, as the following message is displayed
on the PC indicating that the files installation is in progress.

P/N 7010-0945 1-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Introduction

Figure 1-15. Copying Feature Files onto Controller

18. The Setup Status screen displays to configure software

installation. When finished, the InstallSheild Wizard Complete
screen displays (Figure 1-16).
Click Finish to exit the install program.

Figure 1-16. Install Finish

19. Once the installation completes, the SSF icon will display on
the controller screen to start SSF.

Before starting SSF, move the slider bar in Control

NOTICE Panel/System/Memory to the most left position to
allow more program memory for SSF to work
properly.

1-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Starting SSF

Uninstalling SSF
The Remove Programs tool in Windows CE or through the Add/
Remove Programs tool in ActiveSync both uninstall (remove) SSF
from the controller.

Removing SSF from the controller is recommended

TIP T before installing a software upgrade. Be sure to
save all necessary job files first.

Starting SSF
To start SSF, tap the SSF icon on the controller screen and then press
the Enter button. Upon initial startup, SSF requires an access code to
run (Figure 1-17). Contact a Topcon representative to acquire the
necessary codes.
• Key Value – the identification number of the device; record to
give to a Topcon representative.
• Activation IDs – the fields in which to enter the security codes
received from a Topcon representative to activate either one or
more of the following purchased modes: TS, Contractor,
Robotic, GPS+, GIS (RT DGPS and PP DGPS), Roads, and
mmGPS.

Figure 1-17. Security

P/N 7010-0945 1-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Introduction

Once entered, the access codes are stored in the secstore file in the
hidden tsv_setup folder in the internal storage of the controller where
TPS folder resides. To view existing codes or add a new code, tap the
Sokkia Logo Help Icon in the top-left corner of the screen and
select the Activate Modules option.

If upgrading existing SSF of previous version to

NOTICE SSF 7, the updated security key is required to
complete the installation of this upgrade.
For help in acquiring this security key, contact
[email protected].

Demo Mode
Upon initial startup, a Demo version of SSF is accessible after
tapping either the ok button or the cancel button on the
Security screen. To run the demo version, tap Close on the warning
message that displays
(Figure 1-18).

Figure 1-18. Access to Demo

A full-featured demo version of SSF will be available with

operational data limited. This demo version can store up to 25
surveyed points and roads of 100 meters in length.

1-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 2

Getting Started
SSF initially creates a Default job upon program installation. By
default, all jobs are stored in the Job folder of the SSF directory
(Figure 2-1).

Figure 2-1. Open Job

• Open – makes the selected job current, and after performing

appropriate connections (see “Connections” on page 2-2) opens
the main screen (see Figure 2-9 on page 2-7).
• Pressing the ok button after selecting a job is analogous to
using the Open button.
• New – press to create a new job (see Chapter 4 on page 4-1).
• Exit – quits the program.
• Browse – press to display browse directories to navigate to a
desired job. Highlight the file and press the ok button to
open the job from a remote directory (Figure 2-2 on page 2-2).

P/N 7010-0945 2-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Getting Started

Figure 2-2. Open Existing Job

Connections
When opening a job, the Connections dialog displays by default
(Figure 2-3 on page 2-3).
1. On the Device tab:
• Select either the GPS or Optical type of device and the job style
to work at the site.
• Select either Base or Rover when working with the base receiver
or the rover receiver in RTK surveys, respectively.
• Check mark the Bluetooth box to enable Bluetooth connection
with the device on the selected communication port.
• The Prompt at startup box is checked by default. Uncheck the
box if you want to enable auto-connection with the device and not
to display the Connections dialog again.
• Press the Connect button to establish the connection selected.

2-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Connections

Figure 2-3. Prompt for Connection at Startup

2. On the Network tab that displays for job configurations to work

in a network (Figure 2-4):

Figure 2-4. Network Connection

• Check mark the Auto-Connect box to enable automatic

connection with the modem.
• Check mark the Check signal quality box to enable checking
quality of the signal.
• Check mark the Auto-Disconnect box to enable disconnecting
from the modem on exiting SSF.

P/N 7010-0945 2-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Getting Started

Transferring Job Files

Starting from version 7, SSF job’s files are made universal for using
on controllers and personal computers. They have the tsj extension
and need no conversion. You can transfer the *.tsj files between
Windows CE and Windows PC databases directly without format
changes using:
• A flash memory card and the PC card reader.
• Copy/paste procedure and ActiveSync connection.

If the job has photo notes and the job history, be sure
NOTICE to copy these folders from the directory where the
job resides. The copied job will work correctly but
the previous job history will be lost.

• Spectrum Link conversion utility installed on the PC and

ActiveSync connection.
• Spectrum Survey Office data processing software installed on the
PC and ActiveSync connection.
• SSF PC installed on the PC through import/export procedure
from/to the Device and ActiveSync connection.

Opening Old Jobs

To open a job created in SSF version 6.11.03 and earlier, click
Job Open Job and tap the Browse button in the Open Job screen
(Figure 2-2 on page 2-2). Then select the Ts6 Job Files (*.tsv) type,
navigate to the desired tsv job, highlight it, and press the ok
button (Figure 2-5).

2-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Opening Old Jobs

Figure 2-5. Open Old Job

Tapping the ok button starts upgrading the job. Tap the Cancel
button to abort upgrading (Figure 2-6).

Figure 2-6. Job Upgrade Progress

When the process is complete, the Cancel button turns into the Done
button, which opens the main screen for the upgraded job.
After pressing the Done button, the *.tsv file turns into the *.tsj file
and the Archive folder is created in the directory where the *.tsv file
was located. This folder stores the .tsv jobs. If the job had a job
history, a directory using the same name as the job, is also created to
store the *.xml file with the job history (Figure 2-7).

P/N 7010-0945 2-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Getting Started

Figure 2-7. Upgraded Jobs

Automatic Job Backups

To increase the reliability of work with jobs in SSF, a backup copy is
automatically created of the current job. This automatic renewal
occurs about every ten minutes and is safely stored with a new name,
i.e., file_name!YYY-MM-DD!.tsj.bak in a folder where the original
*.tsj file is located.
SSF will create a separate *.bak file for the current job every time the
user opens the *.tsj file during the day with another date, but there
cannot be more than three such files. If the *.tsj file is opened in
subsequent days, the *.bak files previously formed will be
overwritten to the ones with the newer dates.
You can change the folder for saving backup copies:
• Tap the Configure Backup icons. The Job Backups screen
displays.
• Check mark the Use custom box to activate a field below. Either
type in a backup target folder or select it.
• The History box shows how many last copies will be daily
created (three copies by default).

2-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Main Screen

Figure 2-8. Job Backups

If, for any reason, there is a problem with opening the original *.tsj
file in SSF, Spectrum Survey Office, or Spectrum Link, you can
rename the latest *.bak file to the *.tsj file and try to open the
renamed file.

Main Screen
SSF main screen opens to work in the current job (Figure 2-9).

Figure 2-9. SSF Main Screen

P/N 7010-0945 2-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Getting Started

SSF has two implementations of graphical user

NOTICE interface: Icon-based and List-based. By default, the
Icon-based interface is open.
To toggle between the Icon and List Menus, tap the
Sokkia Logo Help Icon in the top-left corner of
the screen and select the Switch Menus option.

Figure 2-10. List Menu

Title Bar
The title bar of the main menu screen shows the name of the job that
is open and the following icons (Table 2-1).
Table 2-1. Title Bar Icons

Icon Description
Sokkia Logo Help Icon – opens a pop-up menu giving access to the
help files (mandatory), and some options specific to the current
screen.
Controller Power Status Icon – shows status of the controller battery.

Connection Status Icon – shows connection status (green stands for an

established connection with the device). Pressing the icon opens the
Connections dialog to reconnect (Figure 2-3 on page 2-3).

2-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Main Screen

Table 2-1. Title Bar Icons (Continued)

Icon Description
Exit Icon – closes SSF. When in a submenu, the Exit Icon turns into
the Back Icon to return to the main menu.

When within a menu option, the title bar displays the Sokkia Logo
Help Icon, the name of the open screen, and any system buttons (the
green tick ok button and the red “x” cancel button) used
to save settings or not (Figure 2-2 on page 2-2).

Main Icons
The SSF Icon Menu on the main screen contains the following icons
to provide access to job configuration, setup, display, and other
jobsite functions, and to control data (Table 2-2):
Table 2-2. Main Menu Icons
Icon Description
Job – opens a submenu to create, open, delete a job or get information
about an active job.

Configure – opens a submenu to create or change a configuration for a

job. The icon changes its appearance and reflects the instrument set for
use in the current job.

Export – opens a submenu to export job data to a new job, controller

or a file.

Import – opens a submenu to import data from a job, controller or a

file.

Edit Job – opens a submenu to edit the job data.

Edit Roads – opens a submenu to edit roads.

P/N 7010-0945 2-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Getting Started

Table 2-2. Main Menu Icons (Continued)

Icon Description
Setup – opens a submenu to set up surveying.

Survey – opens a submenu to conduct a survey.

Stake – opens a submenu to stake out objects.

COGO – opens a submenu to calculate cogo tasks.

Map – opens the map for the current job.

Connections – switches between GPS and Optical instruments and

sets a connection with the instrument for a survey.

Viewing Port Traffic

To view or save to a file incoming and outgoing traffic information of
a controller port connected with SSF, tap the Sokkia Logo Help Icon
in the top-left corner of the Icon Menu screen and select the
Port Data Logging option.
1. The Port Logging screen (Figure 2-11 on page 2-11) initially
shows no data. Tap the Help Icon in the upper-left corner of the
screen to open a pop-up menu and select one of the following
options:
• Show incoming port data – check mark to view incoming
data.
• Show outgoing port data – check mark to view outgoing
data.

2-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Viewing Port Traffic

• Pause logging to screen – check mark to freeze the show of

port traffic.

Figure 2-11. Port Logging

2. Check mark the Log to file box to save the data to a file. When
the Save File screen (Figure 2-12) displays, assign a name and
select a desired directory in the controller to save the file.

Figure 2-12. Save File

3. Tap the ok icon to return to the Port Logging screen to

view the data being saved to the file. The file name is also
shown on the screen (Figure 2-13).

P/N 7010-0945 2-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Getting Started

4. Check mark the Append box to add new data to the existing file
on every start of SSF. Press the ok icon to confirm.

Figure 2-13. Logging to File

Accessing Help Files

Tap the Sokkia Logo Help Icon in the top-left corner of any
screen and select the Help option to open the general SSF Help topics
or a specific option for the current screen (Figure 2-14).

Figure 2-14. SSF General Help Topics

2-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Before Surveying

Before Surveying
To start surveying with SSF, make several preparations of the
available equipment (see “Preparation” on page 3-1), and create a job
to perform specific tasks on the jobsite (see “Creating a New Job” on
page 4-1).
The following sections describe the various SSF functions to assist in
getting started with the software.

Data corruption may occur during data collection if

NOTICE the controller is low on power. If a warning about
low power level displays, save and close the current
job.

P/N 7010-0945 2-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Getting Started

Notes:

2-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 3

Preparation
GPS Receiver Setup
1. Plumb the survey antenna over the mark and switch on the
receiver and the controller.
2. If the receiver and the controller are Bluetooth® enabled, set
the Instrument type to GPS and check the Bluetooth option in
SSF (you can change this setting later in the Connections
screen).
To change the Bluetooth device that the controller is connected
to, click the Connection icon in the upper-right corner of
the main screen.
3. If the receiver or the controller are not Bluetooth enabled, or the
Bluetooth option is unchecked, connect the receiver to the
controller with the cable and set the device type to GPS in SSF
(you can change this setting later in the Connections screen)
(Figure 3-1).

Figure 3-1. GPS Mode

P/N 7010-0945 3-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Preparation

Total Station (TS) Setup

1. Set up a tripod and then center the instrument over the mark.
2. By adjusting the tripod legs, center the cross hairs on the
ground mark. Complete the process by using the leveling
screws of the instrument so that the bubble indicates a level
position. Switch on the total station and the controller.
3. If the total station and the controller are Bluetooth enabled,
perform the following operations:
• In the total station – select Bluetooth option and set PIN code.
• In SSF – set the device type to Optical in the Connections
screen; select the TS model and set the Connection mode to
Bluetooth TS; enable the Bluetooth option in the
Connections screen.

Figure 3-2. Optical Mode

• Select the TS from the list of devices and set the Passkey
value to PIN code (use the same code used in the total
station).
To change the Bluetooth device that the controller is
connected to, click the Connection icon in the upper right
corner of the main screen.

3-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Level Setup

4. If the total station or the controller are not Bluetooth enabled, or

the Bluetooth option is not check marked, connect the
controller to the total station with the cable and set the
Instrument type to Total Station in SSF. Make sure the data
transfer parameters in the total station correspond to those in
the controller.

Level Setup
1. Set up the instrument in a desired location, with the tripod legs
well spread and tapped into the ground.
2. By adjusting the tripod legs, roughly level the instrument.
Complete the process by turning the level screws of the
instrument to center the bubble within the circle. Switch on the
instrument and the controller. Make sure that in the level the
Out Module is set to RS-232C and the Measure option is
selected from the Menu.
3. Connect the controller to the instrument with the cable and set
the device type to Optical in SSF.

Figure 3-3. Level Mode

P/N 7010-0945 3-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Preparation

Notes:

3-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 4

Creating a New Job

Follow the procedure below to begin working with SSF and to create
a New Job file.
1. Tap Job New Job or tap the New button on the Open Job
screen during initial startup (see Figure 2-1 on page 2-1). The
New Job screen displays (Figure 4-1). Enter the Name of the
job (mandatory) and any other informations. The date is stored
automatically.

Figure 4-1. New Job

The job name is considered invalid if it contains:

NOTICE
• more than 63 characters
• any of symbols ! , ? % * @ # $ % ^ & ' " \ / | ~ ;
[]{}()<>`+=

Tap the ok button to make the new job current

NOTICE
and use the settings from the previously open job.

P/N 7010-0945 4-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

2. Tap Next to move to the next screen. At any stage, you can
select the ok button to create a new job. See the following
sections to create a new job for your mode of survey.
A Job file contains all the pertinent data for the work being done:
settings of the performed work and information on the Survey
Configuration.
A Survey Configuration is a set of settings, such as instrument
parameters or radio settings, which are independent of the job
(one configuration can be used on several jobs).
Survey configurations are stored in the Styles.tsstyles file in the
SSF directory.
3. By default all job files are stored in the Job folder of the SSF
directory. To change the location of the job being created, tap
Browse on the New Job screen. The last specified file path is
retained.
4. On the Survey Style screen (Figure 4-2), select the Survey
Configuration, for both the GPS+ and Optical and tap Next. A
Survey Configuration is a set of parameters that describe work
conditions and depend upon the instrument used for the survey.
The last open configuration will initially display.

Figure 4-2. Select Survey Configuration

See the following sections for procedures to create and edit survey
configurations.

4-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• “Creating a GPS+ Configuration” on page 4-3

• “Creating Optical Configuration” on page 4-56

A user-friendly Wizard interface guides you

NOTICE
through the steps to create a job configuration.

Configuration settings are applied to the equipment

NOTICE only after opening a screen that measures and stores
data in the job file.

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

A new configuration is performed with the help of a Wizard.
When creating a GPS+ configuration, use pre-defined configurations
or create new ones. The pre-defined configurations are listed in drop-
down menus in the corresponding fields. In the GPS+ Configuration
field, choose one of the pre-defined configurations or tap the
button to create a new style or edit the parameters of an existing one.
The Configurations screen displays. The Configurations screen
contains a list of available GPS+ configurations (Figure 4-3).

Figure 4-3. Create/Edit a Configuration

1. To create a new configuration, tap the Add button (Figure 4-3).

P/N 7010-0945 4-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

2. On the Survey Configuration screen, choose the configuration

type (either RTK, Network RTK, Real Time DGPS, Network
DGPS, PP Static, PP Kinematic, or PP DGPS) and enter the
name of the configuration (Figure 4-4). Tap Next.

Figure 4-4. Configure an RTK Survey

For Network RTK, Network DGPS and RT DGPS survey modes,

select the corrections type (Figure 4-5):

Figure 4-5. Configure a Network RTK, Network DGPS, and RT DGPS

• VRS, MAC, FKP, Single Base or External Config for Network

RTK and Network DGPS (except MAC).
• User Base, Beacon, SBAS, CDGPS, OmniSTAR-VBS or
OmniSTAR-HP for RT and Network DGPS surveys.

4-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• Post Processing – check mark and enable to configure a post

processing survey type in either RTK, Network RTK, Network
DGPS, RT DGPS mode.
3. On the Receiver Make screen (Figure 4-6 on page 4-5) you
can:
• Select a Manufacture for the rover and/or base; either Sokkia or
Topcon.
• Run SSF GPS mode in a Simulation Mode for practicing or
demonstration purposes. Use the Set Simulator icon appear on
the Edit Job menu to change the current position for simulation.
4. Depending on the mode, continue creating the configuration:
• For RTK see page 4-6.
• For Network RTK and Network DGPS see page 4-31.
• For RT DGPS see page 4-43.
• For PP Static survey mode see page 4-52.
• For PP Kinematic and PP DGPS see page 4-49.

Figure 4-6. Receiver Make

P/N 7010-0945 4-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

RTK Survey Configuration

Real time kinematic (RTK) surveying is used for topographic survey
and stakeout, and is the most precise method of real-time surveying.
RTK requires at least two receivers (Base and Rover) collecting
navigation data simultaneously and being linked via a communication
system. The Base receiver is usually at a known location and serves
as a reference station. The Base receiver collects carrier phase
measurements, generates RTK corrections, and transmits this data to
the Rover. The Rover receiver processes its carrier phase
observations with the received corrections, computing its relative
position. The closer the Rover is to the Base, the higher the
probability of determining the integer values of ambiguities.
To enable logging Base and Rover data for post processing in RTK
survey, check and enable the Post Processing box in the Survey
screen.
To configure a mmGPS+ aided RTK survey, check and enable the
mmGPS+ box on the Survey screen.
After naming the configuration, selecting its type and instrument
manufacturer, tap Next on the Receiver Make screen (Figure 4-6 on
page 4-5) and continue below to finish the configuration for an RTK.
1. Set the parameters for the Base Receiver (Figure 4-7), and tap
Next:
• Select Receiver Model of the Topcon or Sokkia receiver being
used for survey. You can select Hiper II, GR-3, GR-5, GMS-2/
GMS-2 Pro, GRS-1, NET G3, or Topcon Generic for any other
Topcon receiver. For Sokkia, either GRX-1, GSR2700 ISX,
GSR1700 CSX, GSR2700 IS, GSR2600 or Radian IS.
• Set Elevation Mask not to use data from satellites below this
elevation.
• Select RTK Format of the Base receiver corrections transmitted
to the Rover: CMR, CMR+, RTCM 2.1, RTCM 2.2, RTCM 2.3,
or RTCM 3.x

4-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• Select the Antenna type from the list and set the height and its
type (either Vertical measured to the antenna reference point or
Slant measured to the antenna edge).
• Press the Peripherals button to enable the Multiple Ports option
if needed to transmit data from different ports of the base receiver
to use for peripherals (see Figure 4-8 on page 4-8).

Figure 4-7. Configure Base Receiver

• Select the Receiver Settings option from the Help Icon menu in
the upper left corner of the Base Receiver screen to turn charging
mode of the receiver battery off as needed.
• If it is necessary to use relative parameters at the base with
CMR+ data transmission, select the Use Relative Calibrations
option from the Help Icon menu. By default, SSF uses Absolute

P/N 7010-0945 4-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

calibration offsets for antennas. Note: You can select this option
when editing the base.

Figure 4-8. Peripherals

2. Set the Base Radio – choose the modem to be used and its
parameters, and tap Next (Figure 4-9).

Figure 4-9. Configure Base Radio

If Multiple Ports are set for peripherals (see Figure 4-8), depending
on the number of ports selected, there can be several radios for
correction data output.

4-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

3. Custom modems use a standard set of parameters: port, parity,

the number of data bits, the baud rate and the number of stop
bits. Tap the Default button to set default settings for the port.
• AirLink GPRS, CDMA, CDPD1, CDMA2000, Generic, Sierra
Wireless MP200 CDPD modem types do not require additional
parameters.
Other modems require additional parameters to be set. These
parameters are available for setting in the Base Radio
Parameters screen.
• For Digital UHF modems (Internal GR-3 Digital UHF, Internal
HiPer Digital UHF, TRL-2 and TRL-35 External Digital UHF,
and RH-1 Digital UHF), set the operation protocol, modulation
type and channel spacing (Figure 4-10).

Figure 4-10. Parameters for Digital UHF Modems

– Simplex: ArWest’s proprietary protocol. Only works with

other ArWest (Digital UHF) radios.
– TRMB: works with Trimble Trim Talk and Trim Mark
Radios.

1. CDPD stands for “Cellular Digital Packet Data”. CDPD is an open

packet data service, defined as an autonomous overlay network,
specified for the cellular TDMA network.

P/N 7010-0945 4-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

– PDL: works with existing PDL radios and Hiper XTs set in
PDL mode.
– select either DBPSK (Differential Binary Phase Shift
Keying) modulation type if using the Simplex protocol or
GMSK (Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying) if using Trimble
or PDL.
• For HiPerXT UHF modem, set the protocol, channel, and power
(Figure 4-11).
– select the protocol for data transmission: either TPS, Topcon
FSCS mode to scan for the best channel on which to
communicate or PDL to communicate with the Rover PDK
radio.
– select a dedicated channel for the PDL protocol.
– select the level of power for RF transmissions: 1W or 2W.

Figure 4-11. UHF Modem

• For FH915Plus modem (Internal HiPer Lite+ FH915Plus,

Internal GR-3 FH915Plus, RE-S1 radio, and RH-1 FH915Plus),
in addition to the operating channel, select the territory and the
operating protocol to communicate with different types of FH915
modem at the base/rover side (see Figure 4-13 on page 4-12).

4-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

– select the territory (North America, Australia, or New

Zealand) to adjust the frequency range and RF power level
for the modem.
– select the operation protocol: either FH915 Ext,
recommended if all receivers on the jobsite are equipped with
FH915Plus radios only,
or FH915, recommended if there is a mixture of receivers
with FH915 and FH915Plus radios on the jobsite.
– select the operating channel.

Figure 4-12. Parameters for FH915+ Modems

P/N 7010-0945 4-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

• For FH915 modem (Internal Hiper® Lite), set the operating

channel of the modem (Figure 4-13).

Figure 4-13. Parameters for the FH915 Modem

• Pacific Crest and Internal HiPer (Pacific Crest) modems need a

channel and sensitivity (either low, moderate, high, or off) to be
chosen (Figure 4-14).

Figure 4-14. Pacific Crest Radio Parameters

4-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• For external Satel modem, set the model, channel, frequency,

PCC (Pacific Crest Corporation) protocol and using FEC
(Forward Error Correction) if necessary (Figure 4-15).

Figure 4-15. Satel Radio Parameters

• For internal Satel modem (Internal HiPer Pro, Internal GR-3

Satel, and RH-1 Satel), you can enable the Free Channel Scan
mode for the base radio (Figure 4-16).

Figure 4-16. Internal Satel Parameters

P/N 7010-0945 4-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

• For AirLink CDMA (Multicast UDP), set IP addresses for data

transmission from the Base Station to more than one Rover
Receiver using CDMA modems (Figure 4-17).

Figure 4-17. Base Multicast Parameters

• For the Internal HiPer GSM, Internal HiPerXT GSM, Internal

CR-3(GSM), Internal CR-3Satel(GSM), Motorola V60, Motorola
V710, MultiTech GSM/GPRS, Siemens TC35, Siemens M20,
Wavecom Fastrack GSM or Nextel i58sr Cell Phone modem
types, set the Base PIN (see Figure 4-18).

Figure 4-18. Base Cell Phone Parameters

4-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 15 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

4. Set parameters for the Rover Receiver, and tap Next.

Figure 4-19. Configure RTK Rover Receiver

• Select Receiver Model of the Topcon or Sokkia receiver being

used for survey, either Hiper II, GR-3,GR-5, GMS-2/GMS-2
Pro, GRS-1, NET G3, or Topcon Generic. For Sokkia, GSR2700
ISX, GSR1700 CSX, GSR2700 IS, GSR2600, GRX-1 or Radian
IS.
• Set Elevation Mask not to use data from satellites below.
• Select RTK Format of the which needs to coincide with this set
for the Base station.
• Select the Antenna type from the list and set the height and its
type, either Vertical (measured to the antenna reference point) or
Slant (measured to the antenna edge).
5. Press the Peripherals button if peripherals are used.
• To output NMEA messages, check mark the NMEA Ports box
and select the number of ports for output.
• To input data from peripherals, check mark the Multiple Ports
box and set the number of ports.
• To enable a mmGPS aided RTK survey, check mark the
mmGPS+ box. The Parameters button opens the mmGPS+
Parameters screen to set the rover port and general parameters

P/N 7010-0945 4-15

SSF_UM_um.book Page 16 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

for the mmGPS+ unit. For this configuration see “mmGPS+

Configuration” on page 4-27.

When measuring the height of the rover antenna,

TIP T include the height of the PZS-1 sensor with a 5/8
inch plug.

• To use a hand held laser measurement system, check mark the

External Laser box and select the device the laser is connected
to.
Press the Parameters button to configure the laser device. For
this configuration, see “Laser Configuration” on page 4-26.

Figure 4-20. Rover Receiver Options

6. Select the Receiver Settings option from the Help Icon menu in
the upper left corner of the Rover Receiver screen, to turn
charging mode of the receiver battery off as needed.
7. If it is necessary to use Relative antenna model at the base
station that transmits CMR+ data, check mark the Relative
calibrations on Base box from the Help Icon menu. By default,
SSF uses Absolute calibration offsets for antennas. Also, you
can select this option when editing the Base.
8. To use the CSD form of data transmission for receiving RTK
corrections through a cellular phone used as a modem, select

4-16 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 17 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

the RTK protocol option from the Help Icon menu in the upper
left corner of the screen (Figure 4-20 on page 4-16).
9. Set the Rover Radio in a manner similar to the Base Radio
setting (see Figure 4-9 on page 4-8) and tap Next.
If Multiple Ports are set for peripherals (see Figure 4-20 on
page 4-16), depending on the number of ports selected, there can
be up to two Rover Radio screens to configure radios for data
input.

Use only one radio to receive correction from the

NOTICE
Base.

If NMEA Ports are set (see Figure 4-20 on page 4-16), depending
on the number of output ports selected, there can be up to two
Config: Output Radio screens to configure radios for NMEA
data output.
10. On the Survey Parms screen, enter Survey parameters and tap
Next (Figure 4-21). These parameters can be changed by
pressing the settings button from any Survey screen in
GPS+ mode.
• Select the Solution Type filter to be used for data logging (Fix
Only; Fix and Float; Fix, Float, DGPS; or All).
• Set the Auto Accept conditions for a simple Topo survey: number
of measurements to be averaged and acceptable horizontal and
vertical precision.

P/N 7010-0945 4-17

SSF_UM_um.book Page 18 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

• Set Auto Topo survey parameters: method of automatic data

logging and the interval in corresponding units.

Figure 4-21. Survey Parameters (RTK)

11. To define the incremental value for the numbering of survey

points, select the Point Increment by number from the drop-
down list (Figure 4-22) on the Point Properties screen. This
screen is opened from the Help Icon menu in the upper left
corner of the Srv Parms screen.

Figure 4-22. Set the Point Properties Option

4-18 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 19 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

12. On the Stk Parms screen, enter parameters and tap Next
(Figure 4-23). These parameters can be changed by pressing
the settings button from any Stakeout screen in GPS+
mode.
• Set the horizontal distance tolerance and the reference direction.
• Select the Solution Type filter to be used for data logging.
• Set the Auto Accept settings for Stakeout which are separate from
the Survey auto-accept settings: number of measurements to be
averaged and acceptable horizontal and vertical precision.

Figure 4-23. Stakeout Parameters

13. To display the icon for the staked point on the map, select the
Display option from the menu in the upper left corner of the Stk
Parms screen. On the Staked Point Icon screen (Figure 4-24),
set appropriate parameters for the icon.

P/N 7010-0945 4-19

SSF_UM_um.book Page 20 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Figure 4-24. Staked Point Icon

14. In the next Stk Parms screen, if necessary, set the rule for
generating the point name and Note of the staked point
(Figure 4-25 on page 4-21).
• Set the rule for defining names for the staked points: like a design
point name, or the next point name, or a design point name with a
pre-defined prefix, or a design point name with a pre-defined
suffix.
The choice of the prefix or suffix appears only when the
corresponding item is chosen from the drop-down menu. Also, a
specified numerical constant can be added to automatically
generate the staked point name.
• Set the rule for setting Notes for staked points. If the Station &
Offset option is selected, an edit box for entering an
alphanumeric prefix appears (Figure 4-25 on page 4-21). For the
United States, this prefix is “Sta”, for the international markets
the prefix is “Cha”, and for the Korean/Japanese markets the
prefix is “No”. With this option activated, depending on the
choice for the prefix, SSF automatically generates one note for
each stakeout point: either Sta5+5.5R5.0, Cha505.5R5.0, or
No.5+5.5R5.0 respectively.

4-20 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 21 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

Figure 4-25. Storing Staked Points

15. You may set advanced parameters for the survey on the
Advanced screen (Figure 4-26 on page 4-22). Tap Next.
• Multipath Reduction – check and enable this field during the
survey to use when a signal received represents multiple
reflections from nearby objects. The box is checked by default to
use this mode during a standard RTK survey or GIS data
collection in standalone or DGPS mode.
• Co-Op Tracking – check and enable to allow a higher efficiency
of multipath reduction.
• Canopy Environment – enable to set less rigid thresholds for the
RTK engine to filter out measurement outliers. Use this mode
when working under tree canopy and in other cases of high
multipath.
• Define the Satellite system to be used.
• Set the RTK Position computation mode that determines whether
or not to Extrapolate the Base carrier phase measurements when
computing the rover's current RTK position. If Matched Epoch is
selected, the RTK engine will compute either a delayed RTK
position (for the epoch to which the newly received RTCM/CMR
message corresponds) or the current standalone position (while
waiting for new messages coming from the base).

P/N 7010-0945 4-21

SSF_UM_um.book Page 22 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

• When the GPS+GLONASS satellite system is selected for the

rover, select a manufacture of the Base receiver to accommodate
differences in processing GLONASS by different companies.
You can select from Topcon Positioning Systems, Sokkia,
Ashtech, Javad, Leica, Magellan, Novatel, Septentrio, Trimble,
Other (for the base receiver of other class included in the IGS
list) or Unknown (for the base receiver’s class not included in the
IGS list). By default, <Automatic Detection> is set.

Figure 4-26. Advanced Parameters

16. To set ambiguity resolution parameters for RTK engine, select

the RTK Settings option from the menu in the upper left corner
of the Advanced screen. In the RTK Settings screen, set
appropriate parameters (see Figure 4-27 on page 4-23).
• Select the Ambiguity Level: governs the RTK engine when
determining whether or not to fix ambiguities. Low, Medium and
High correspond to the indicator's 95%, 99.5% and 99.9% states,
respectively. The higher the specified confidence level, the longer
the ambiguity search time.
• Set the Resolution Period that defines the differential correction
update interval. Before entering a value, know the exact rate at
which the reference station broadcasts differential correction
data. This interval will only be used if the receiver is ran in Delay
mode. The interval also provides more reliable synchronization
between the Base station and Rover receiver.

4-22 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 23 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• Set Expected Correction: differential correction update interval

for base station, effective only in the RTK Matched Epoch mode.
The value should be set to the exact rate at which the base station
transmits its differential correction data. This parameter will
instruct the rover receiver to output the RTK position at the same
rate at which differential corrections are updated.

Figure 4-27. RTK Settings

17. On the Miscellaneous screen (Figure 4-28), select the

necessary options to customize the user interface during GPS
measurements: display of computed coordinates, prompts for
antenna height, and beeps upon storing points.

Figure 4-28. Miscellaneous

P/N 7010-0945 4-23

SSF_UM_um.book Page 24 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

18. Tap the ok button to store the settings and to return to the
Survey Config screen. The name of the created configuration
will display in the drop-down menu in the GPS+ Config field.
This configuration can be used on several jobs.

Configurations are stored in a file called

NOTICE
Styles.tsstyles located in the SSF directory.

NMEA Output Configuration

To enable outputting NMEA messages (Figure 4-29 on page 4-25),
take the following steps:
1. Press the Peripherals button on the Rover Receiver screen (see
Figure 4-19 on page 4-15).
2. Check and enable the NMEA Ports box on the Peripherals
screen (Figure 4-20 on page 4-16) and select the number of
ports for output of NMEA messages.
3. Configure all output radios in the Output Radio screens
available depending on the number of output ports selected.
4. Select the types of sentences to issue via the specified receiver
port at the interval set in seconds (up to 0.1 sec).
• GSA – outputs the operation mode of the GNSS receiver, the
satellite used for positioning, and DOP.
• GLL – outputs data on the current latitude/longitude and
positioning mode.
• VTG – outputs the traveling direction and velocity.
• GRS – outputs the residual error of distance for each satellite,
is used to support RAIM.
• ZDA – outputs UTC, day, month, year, and local time zone.
• GST – outputs the statistics of position errors.
• GNS – outputs data on time, position, and positioning of
GPS+GLONASS (GNSS).
• GGA – outputs data on time, position and positioning.

4-24 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 25 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• GSV – outputs the number of satellites, satellite number,

elevation angle, azimuthal angle, and SNR.
• HDT – outputs the direction (heading).
• P_ATT – outputs attitude parameters.
• RMC – outputs time, date, position, course and speed data
provided by a GNSS navigation receiver.
• ROT – outputs rate of turn.
• GMP – outputs GNSS map projection fix data.
5. Set the Interval in seconds (up to 0.1 sec) at which the
messages will be issued.
6. If needed, check mark the Set GP as Receiver Talker ID box to
instruct the receiver to use "GP" as Talker ID in appropriate
NMEA sentences generated. Check mark and enable to support
Goggle Maps that cannot recognize default "GN" or "GL" as
Talker IDs in these sentences.

Figure 4-29. Config: Output NMEA

P/N 7010-0945 4-25

SSF_UM_um.book Page 26 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Laser Configuration
To use a hand held laser measurement system, take the following
steps:
1. Press the Peripherals button on the Rover Receiver screen (see
Figure 4-19 on page 4-15).
2. Check and enable the External Laser box on the Peripherals
screen (Figure 4-20 on page 4-16) and select the device (either
Receiver or Controller) the laser is connected to.
3. Press the Parameters button to configure the laser device.
4. In the Config: Laser screen, set the properties for the laser
device: a laser manufacturer, the instrument model and type,
and laser port settings (see Figure 4-30). Tap the ok
button.

Figure 4-30. Laser Configuration

Table 4-1 lists the supported manufacturers and models of laser

devices.
Table 4-1. Laser Device Manufacturer and Model

Type of Laser measurement

Manufacturer Model
system

MDL LaserAce 300 Range Finder Only

Range Finder with Encoder

4-26 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 27 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

Table 4-1. Laser Device Manufacturer and Model

Type of Laser measurement

Manufacturer Model
system

Laser Technology, Inc. Impulse 200 Impulse Only

Impulse with Compass

Laser Technology, Inc. TruPulse 200 TruPulse Only

TruPulse with Encoder

Laser Technology, Inc. TruPulse 360 TruPulse Only

TruPulse with Compass

mmGPS+ Configuration
An RTK mmGPS+ survey system uses a wireless PZS-1 sensor at the
Rover and the PZL-1 transmitter to obtain accurate (millimeter)
elevations.
1. Press the Peripherals button on the Rover Receiver screen.
2. Check and enable the mmGPS+ box on the Peripherals screen
to configure the mmGPS+.
3. Tap the Parameters button and select the options in the
mmGPS+ Parameters screen (Figure 4-31). Tap the ok
button.
• Select a port from the Receiver port drop-down list used for
communication between receiver and PZS-1 sensor (typically
port D).
• Select Auto from the Sensor Gain drop-down list to
automatically control the mmGPS receiver's detection level
of the transmitter's signal.

P/N 7010-0945 4-27

SSF_UM_um.book Page 28 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

• Enter the threshold for the difference between GPS and

mmGPS+ height measurements in the Height Difference
Limit field.

Figure 4-31. mmGPS+ Parameters Screen Options

PP Enabled RTK Survey Configuration

In RTK survey with enabled post processing, the collected Base and
Rover data are written to files for further post processing.
1. Enable logging the Base and Rover data by selecting the Post
Processing check box in the Survey screen (Figure 4-4 on
page 4-4).
2. On the Receiver Make screen (Figure 4-6 on page 4-5) select a
Manufacture for the rover and/or base; either Topcon or
Sokkia, and tap Next.
3. Set the parameters for the Base Receiver (see Figure 4-7 on
page 4-7), and tap Next.

4-28 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 29 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

4. Set the logging parameters for the Base receiver: the file name,
logging rate and the device in which raw data is logged to
(currently only the Receiver is available). Tap the Next button.

Figure 4-32. Config: Base PP Setup

5. Configure the Base Radio (see Figure 4-9 on page 4-8) and tap
Next.
6. Set the parameters for the Rover Receiver (see Figure 4-19 on
page 4-15), and tap Next.
7. On the Rover PP Setup screen (Figure 4-33 on page 4-30), set
the logging parameters for the Rover receiver: the file name,
logging rate, and the device in which raw data is logged to
(currently only the Receiver is available).

P/N 7010-0945 4-29

SSF_UM_um.book Page 30 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Select whether to start logging manually or automatically as

data is being collected. Tap the Next button.

Figure 4-33. Rover PP Setup

8. Configure the Rover Radio, and the mmGPS+ system if used,

then tap Next.
9. On the Init Times screen (see Figure 4-34 on page 4-31), set
the Initialization Times parameters, the times required for
ambiguity resolution in the specific operating environment.
These are used during automatic mode of the survey and
depends upon the number of satellites available and the number
of frequencies being used. For example, the default for six
GPS/GLONASS (6+) dual frequency satellites is ten minutes.
This means that the complete Rover file should be at least this
long. Then tap Next.
10. On the Survey Parameters screen, be sure to set the Auto Topo
Interval multiple to the logging rate in the receiver.
11. Complete the configuration of the PP enabled RTK in a manner
similar to RTK.

4-30 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 31 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

Figure 4-34. Initialization Times

Network RTK Survey Configuration

Network Real Time Kinematic (Network RTK) surveying is similar
to RTK surveying but the correction data for the Rover is derived
from the reference station network solution. Today’s operating
reference station networks are creating either Virtual Reference
Station (VRS) data, Master-Auxiliary Concept (MAC) data, or
network area corrections (FKP parameters).
1. After naming the configuration and selecting its type in the
Survey screen, select the desired correction type (Figure 4-5 on
page 4-4) and tap Next.
• VRS – to receive RTK corrections from a VRS base station.
• MAC –to use a set of MAC corrections
• FKP – to use a set of FKP corrections.
• Single Base – to receive RTK corrections from a single base.
• External Config – when the receiver uses an External
program to configure RTK corrections.
2. On the Rover Recvr screen, select the Receiver Model, set the
Elevation Mask and antenna parameters for the Rover

P/N 7010-0945 4-31

SSF_UM_um.book Page 32 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Receiver. Then select one of the following protocols from the

Protocol drop-down list (Figure 4-35). Tap Next.
• NTRIP – (default) Networked Transport of RTCM via
Internet Protocol to receive RTK corrections from a NTRIP
Caster.
• TCP/IP – select to receive RTK corrections through the
Internet.
• CSD Data – select to use the CSD form of data transmission
to receive RTK corrections through a cellular phone used as a
modem.

Figure 4-35. Rover Receiver

3. On the Config: Modem screen (Figure 4-36 on page 4-33)

select Controller if the modem is connected to the controller or
Receiver if the modem is internal or external, but connected
directly to the receiver.
4. If connecting to the Controller, use the Dialup Network
Connection for connecting to the Internet to get correction
data. Tapping Next displays the Modem Internet Info screen
(Figure 4-38 on page 4-34).

4-32 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 33 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

Figure 4-36. Modem Connect

5. If connecting to the Receiver, configure the connection

parameters for External AirLink Modem SW, External CDMA
Modem FW, External GPRS Modem FW, Internal CDMA,
Internal GPRS and Generic modems and tap Next.

NTRIP Internet Configuration

First contact the network administrator to gain access to the system.
You will need the IP address and Port to connect to, the user name
and password for NTRIP. Use the following methods to connect to
the network:
1. If the receiver currently being used has an internal GSM/GPRS/
CDMA modem, use the Internal Modem along with a SIM
Card obtained from a service provider. Note that the receiver
must have the appropriate firmware version.
2. If an external modem is connected to the receiver, use either
Firmware or Software dialup, depending on the modem type
supported by the firmware.
3. If using a cellular phone that is data enabled and connected to
the controller, use Dialup Networking Connection in SSF to
connect to the network.

P/N 7010-0945 4-33

SSF_UM_um.book Page 34 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

The following setup is an example of a GPRS connection

(Figure 4-37). However, any generic method for connecting to the
Internet can be used. Note that a Network RTK setup requires two-
way communication links (like GSM and GPRS setups).

Figure 4-37. Rover Radio

4. Select a base Internet address and port from the list and tap
Next. For Internet connection from the controller side, you can
set up NTRIP connection using a web address. New IP/Web
addresses/ports can be deleted or added to the list. If needed,
check mark the Use GPUID box to turn on the method of
GPUID authorization.

Figure 4-38. Modem Internet Info

4-34 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 35 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

5. Tapping Next displays the Config: Login Info screen

(Figure 4-39) only if NTRIP was selected as the protocol to
receive RTK corrections via the Internet.
6. Enter the NTRIP user name and password provided by the VRS
service provider and tap Next.

Figure 4-39. NTRIP Login Info

7. Use the Config: Modem Dialup Info screen (Figure 4-40) to

input Internet User ID, Password, PIN number, and APN
(Access Point Name). Select the type of modem.

Figure 4-40. Config: Modem Dialup Info

P/N 7010-0945 4-35

SSF_UM_um.book Page 36 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

8. Clicking the Defaults button will reset all settings to default

values of the selected provider.
9. Select a port for Advance Input Mode from the Virtual Radio
Port field. Only a port currently not in use can be selected as a
Virtual Radio Port.

Figure 4-41. Modem Receiver Info

An appropriate Virtual radio port is selected

NOTICE
automatically, basing on the receiver model used.

10. Continue configuring the Network RTK survey type in a

manner similar to RTK.
11. After completing the survey configuration, and tapping the ok
button, if it is enabled in the Connections dialog (see
Figure 2-4 on page 2-3), automatic connection to the NTRIP
server is performed for Internal CDMA and GPRS modems.

4-36 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 37 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• First SSF queries information from the modem.

Figure 4-42. Querying Modem Info

• Then the signal quality is checked if it is enabled in the

Connections dialog (see Figure 2-4 on page 2-3).

Figure 4-43. Querying Signal Quality

P/N 7010-0945 4-37

SSF_UM_um.book Page 38 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

• Daisy Chain is closed, and connecting to the Internet starts.

Figure 4-44. Connecting to the Internet

• After making PPP connection, querying Mount Points is

performed, and the Radio port starts to connect with the NTRIP
server (Figure 4-45).

Figure 4-45. Starting Radio Port

4-38 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 39 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• NTRIP connection is established, and the modem is successfully

set to receive correctional data from the NTRIP server.

Figure 4-46. Modem is Set Successfully

12. If automatic connection is disabled in the Connections dialog

(see Figure 2-4 on page 2-3), you can configure the modem
from the Status or Topo screens.
13. Tap Setup GPS Status. Select Config Modem from the Help
Icon menu in the upper-left corner of the Status screen to make
a connection (Figure 4-47).

Figure 4-47. Starting Radio Port

P/N 7010-0945 4-39

SSF_UM_um.book Page 40 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

14. Tapping the red icon will open the Internet Connect
screen that displays all of the parameters you will need for PPP
connection. Make sure all values are correct and tap the
Connect button to make the PPP connection.

Figure 4-48. Internet Connect

15. When doing the connection, PPP connection starts to cycle

through the baud rates: it should connect at 38400. It can take a
few minutes to do so. Once connected the red icon will turn to
green .

Figure 4-49. Internet Connection

4-40 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 41 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

16. After the PPP connection is established, tap the Update button
to retrieve Mount Points from the NTRIP Caster at the
specified IP address and Port. Select the correct Mount Point.

Figure 4-50. Update Mount Points

17. Tap the Connect button to start getting corrections from the
selected Mount Point. A successful message will displays
(Figure 4-51).

Figure 4-51. Network Connection Started

18. Tapping the Disconnect button disconnects from the current

Mount Point.

P/N 7010-0945 4-41

SSF_UM_um.book Page 42 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

19. Tapping the Stream Info button displays information on the

selected Mount Point.

Figure 4-52. Mount Point Information

PP Enabled Network RTK Survey Configuration

In Network RTK survey with enabled post processing, the correction
data at the reference station and the collected Rover data are written
to files for further post processing.
1. Enable logging Rover data by selecting the Post Processing
checkbox in the Survey screen (Figure 4-4 on page 4-4).
2. Set the logging parameters for the Rover receiver: the file
name, logging rate and the device in which raw data is logged
to (currently only “Receiver” is available). Select whether to
start logging manually or automatically as data are being
collected (Figure 4-33 on page 4-30). Tap the Next button.
3. Continue configuring the PP enabled Network RTK in a
manner similar to Network RTK until the Init Times screen.
4. On the Init Times screen (Figure 4-34 on page 4-31), set the
Initialization Times parameters, the times required for
ambiguity resolution in the specific operating environment.
These are used during automatic mode of the survey and
depend upon the number of satellites available and the number
of frequencies being used. Then tap Next.

4-42 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 43 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

5. Complete configuring the PP enabled Network RTK in a

manner similar to Network RTK.

Network DGPS
The configuring of the Network DGPS survey type is the same as for
Network RTK. For details on configuring Network survey, see
“Network RTK Survey Configuration” on page 4-31. The difference
is that the Solution type is set to DGPS. The same applies to the PP
enabled Network DGPS configuration. For details on configuring a
PP enabled Network survey, see “PP Enabled Network RTK Survey
Configuration” on page 4-42.

RT DGPS Survey Configuration

Real time differential (DGPS) surveying is used for topographic
survey and stakeout. RT DGPS typically uses the measurements from
two or more remote receivers to calculate the difference between
measurements, providing more accurate position solutions.
One or more Base receivers are placed at known locations and serves
as reference stations. These reference stations collect the range
measurements from each GPS satellite in view and forms the
differences (corrections) between the calculated distances to the
satellites and the measured pseudo-ranges to the satellites. These
corrections are then built up to the industry standard (RTCM or
various proprietary standards) established for transmitting differential
corrections and broadcast to the rover receiver(s) using a data
communication link. The Rover receiver applies the transmitted
DGPS corrections to its range measurements of the same satellites.
A number of differential services exist to transmit differential
correctional data, including maritime radio beacons, geostationary
satellites (as with the OmniSTAR service), and SBAS (Satellite-
Based Augmentation Systems) service.
To enable logging rover data for post-processing in RT DGPS survey,
select and enable the Post Processing box in the Survey screen.

P/N 7010-0945 4-43

SSF_UM_um.book Page 44 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

After naming the configuration, selecting a type and correction type,

(see Figure 4-5 on page 4-4), and continue below to finish the
configuration for a RT DGPS Survey configuration.
In user-based mode, the Base and Rover receivers are set in a manner
similar to setting RTK receivers.
1. Set the parameters for the Rover Receiver: DGPS Format ((Full
(RTCM 1,31,3) and Partial (RTCM 9,34,3) or from a Beacon
station (RTCM 2.1, 2.2, or 2.3 can be selected)) and/or
Elevation Mask and Antenna parameters in the same way as for
RTK survey (see Figure 4-19 on page 4-15), then tap Next.
2. Set appropriate parameters to use differential correction data
from a differential service enabled for the Rover, and tap Next.
• For Radio Beacons, select the country and the name of the beacon
station (Figure 4-53).

Figure 4-53. Config: Beacon

• To use the beacon receiver BR-1 as a source of differential

corrections for the rover, select Beacon Corrections from
BR-1 option on the Config: Beacon screen (Figure 4-54 on
page 4-45).

4-44 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 45 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

Figure 4-54. Use BR-1

– To get the Beacon signal automatically, check and enable the

Automatic Scan Mode option to search broadcasting
frequencies and output RTCM corrections from the best
signal. Tap Next.
– Set the port for connection to the receiver or the controller
and the baud rate for data transfer. Other options are not
available for this device. Tap Next.

Figure 4-55. Configure BR-1

P/N 7010-0945 4-45

SSF_UM_um.book Page 46 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

– Select a port from the Virtual Radio Port drop-down list, the
receiver port on which the receiver will receive the RTCM
messages from the controller (Figure 4-56). Tap Next.

Figure 4-56. Virtual Radio Port

• For SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation Systems), select

satellites of a satellite-based augmentation system (WAAS/
EGNOS/MSAS) to improve accuracy of DGPS solutions
(Figure 4-57 on page 4-47):
– Check the boxes near the PRN numbers of the satellites. All
satellites can be selected. The satellite most available from
those selected will be used in Code DGPS solution.
– Enable use of ionospheric corrections from the selected
satellites when computing positions.
None: ionospheric corrections are not used
Apply if avail: use ionospheric corrections if available
Use sat only if avail: use only the satellites for which
ionospheric corrections are available.

4-46 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 47 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

Figure 4-57. SBAS Setup

• For OmniSTAR-VBS and OmniSTAR-HP (a wide-area, satellite

delivered, differential Virtual Base Station and High Performance
GPS services), select the name of the satellite to be used
(Figure 4-58).

Figure 4-58. Config: OmniSTAR

P/N 7010-0945 4-47

SSF_UM_um.book Page 48 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

• For CDGPS (Canadian nation-wide DGPS service), set the

parameters for the receiver port connected to the CDGPS radio
(Figure 4-59).

Figure 4-59. CDGPS Radio

3. The remaining steps are similar to those for an RTK survey.

PP Enabled RT DGPS Survey Configuration

In RT DGPS surveys with enabled post processing, the differential
correction data and the collected rover data are written to files for
further post processing.
1. Enable logging the rover data for post processing in the DGPS
survey by checking the Post Processing box in the Survey
screen (Figure 4-4 on page 4-4).
2. Configure the Rover Receiver. Then tap Next.
3. Set the logging parameters for the Rover receiver: the file
name, logging rate, and the device in which raw data is logged
to (currently only “Receiver” is available). Select whether to
start logging manually or automatically as data are being
collected (Figure 4-33 on page 4-30). Tap the Next button.
4. Set appropriate parameters to use differential correction data
from a differential service enabled for the Rover (for details
refer to “RT DGPS Survey Configuration” on page 4-43), and
tap Next.

4-48 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 49 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

5. On the Init Times screen (Figure 4-34 on page 4-31), set the
Initialization Times parameters, the times required for
ambiguity resolution in the specific operating environment.
The parameters are used during automatic mode of the survey and
depend upon the number of satellites available and the number of
frequencies being used. Then tap Next.
6. Complete the configuration of the PP enabled Real Time DGPS
in a manner similar to Real Time DGPS.

PP Kinematic and PP DGPS Survey

Configurations
After naming the configuration, selecting its type and correction type,
continue below to finish the configuration for a PP Kinematic and PP
DGPS Survey configuration.
1. Set the parameters for the Base Receiver: Receiver Model,
Elevation Mask and Base antenna parameters (Figure 4-60),
then tap Next.

Figure 4-60. Base Receiver (PP Kinematic or PP DGPS)

2. Set Raw Data Logging parameters: select a file name, device

where raw data is logged, and the logging rate (Figure 4-61 on
page 4-50). Tap Next.

P/N 7010-0945 4-49

SSF_UM_um.book Page 50 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Figure 4-61. Base PP Setup

Raw data always records into the receiver memory.

NOTICE
SSF allows the logging to the controller when in PP
DGPS mode of survey only.

3. Set the parameters for the Rover Receiver: Receiver Model,

Elevation Mask, and Rover antenna parameters (Figure 4-62),
then tap Next.

Figure 4-62. Rover Receiver (PP Kinematic or PP DGPS)

4-50 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 51 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

4. Set the Raw Data Logging parameters for the Rover Receiver.

Figure 4-63. Rover Receiver (PP Kinematic and PP DGPS)

5. In PP Kinematic mode, set Initialization times for a given

number of satellites and frequency modes on the Init Times
screen (Figure 4-64), and tap Next. Initialization Times are the
times required to estimate fixed ambiguity positions, which
depend upon the number of satellites available and the number
of frequencies being used.

Figure 4-64. Initialization Times

P/N 7010-0945 4-51

SSF_UM_um.book Page 52 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

6. On the Srv Parms screen, set the Number of Epochs for the
Topo survey (Figure 4-65 on page 4-52).

Figure 4-65. Survey Parms (PP Kinematic and PP DGPS)

7. For an Auto Topo survey, select the Method from the drop-
down list and set the Interval multiple to the logging rate in the
Receiver.
8. Complete configuring the PP Kinematic and PP DGPS survey
type in a manner similar to RTK.
9. Tap the ok icon to store the settings and to return to the
Survey Config screen.

PP Static Survey Configuration

After naming the configuration and selecting its type, continue below
to finish the configuration.
1. Set the Receiver Model, Elevation Mask, and the static antenna
parameters (Figure 4-66 on page 4-53), then tap Next.

4-52 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 53 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

Figure 4-66. Static Receiver

2. Set the Raw Data Logging parameters: File Name, device

where raw data is logged to, and logging rate (Figure 4-67).

Figure 4-67. Base PP Setup

3. Set the Occupation Times parameters, the times required for

ambiguity resolution in the common operating environment
(Figure 4-68). These are used during automatic mode of a PP
Static Survey and depend upon the number of satellites
available and the number of frequencies being used.

P/N 7010-0945 4-53

SSF_UM_um.book Page 54 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Figure 4-68. Occupation Times

4. Set Stakeout Parameters in the Stk Parms screens

(Figure 4-69), then tap Next.

Figure 4-69. Stakeout Parameters Screens

For details on stakeout parameters, refer to the description on

page 4-19.
5. Set the advanced parameters for the survey (Figure 4-70) and
tap Next.

4-54 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 55 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a GPS+ Configuration

• Multipath reduction is used when a signal received represents

multiple reflections from nearby objects. Enable this field to use
this mode during a survey.
• To use the Co-Op Tracking mode, allowing higher efficiency of
multipath reduction, check and enable this field and select the
satellite system to be used.

Figure 4-70. Config: Advanced

6. Select needed options in the Miscellaneous screen (see

Figure 4-28 on page 4-23).
7. Tap the ok icon to store the settings, return to the Survey
Style screen and continue with the configuration setup. The
name of the created configuration displays in the GPS+ Config
field drop-down menu.

P/N 7010-0945 4-55

SSF_UM_um.book Page 56 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Creating Optical Configuration

Optical configuration includes Total Stations and Level instruments.
Use pre-defined configurations or create new ones. The pre-defined
configurations are listed in the drop-down menus in the
corresponding fields in the Survey Configurations screen (Figure 4-2
on page 4-2). In the Optical Configuration field choose one of the
pre-defined configurations or tap the List button to create a new
configuration or to edit an existing one. The Configurations screen
displays (Figure 4-71) which contains a list of available Optical
configurations. Either edit the existing configuration or create a new
one. To simulate a real survey, select Manual Mode. In this mode, no
measurements are performed, all the data is entered manually.

Figure 4-71. Configurations

1. To create a new configuration, tap the Add button. To edit an

existing configuration, select it from the list and tap Edit.
2. On the Survey screen, enter a name for the Configuration and
select its type, then tap Next (Figure 4-72 on page 4-57).
• Use the Robotic type if the survey can be performed by one
person and the instrument is motorized.
• If a reflector is not used, choose the Reflectorless type.
• In all other cases of TS survey, use the Conventional type.
• Use the Level type to perform Levelling with digital level.

4-56 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 57 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating Optical Configuration

Figure 4-72. Survey

3. In the Instrument screen, select the manufacturer (Topcon or

Sokkia) and the model of the device, then tap Next (Figure 4-
73 on page 4-57). For Conventional surveys Nikon and Leica
instruments can be also defined. Leica instruments are also
supported in the Reflectorless survey type. Note that the models
shown in the list correspond to the chosen type of survey.

Figure 4-73. Instrument

For the Monitor survey with robotic total stations, select Monitor
from the context menu in the upper-left corner of the screen to set the
format and destination of the output file.

P/N 7010-0945 4-57

SSF_UM_um.book Page 58 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

4. On the Conn Mode screen, select the connection mode (the

Initial TS Connection parameter from the drop-down list) and
tap the Next button (Figure 4-74).
Selections depend on the instrument type: Cable; Radios, RC2
Only, RC3 Only, and Bluetooth TS; for IS and IS2 Robot, RC3
is available for configuration.

Figure 4-74. Conn Mode

5. On the Cable screen, select the communication settings for the

cable connection: Baud (baud rate), Parity, Data (number of the
data bits), and Stop (number of the stop bits) and tap the Next
button (Figure 4-75).

Figure 4-75. Cable

4-58 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 59 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating Optical Configuration

The Radio screen displays (for a Robotic survey): select either

Mode (for motorized Conventional or Reflectorless surveys), or
Survey Parameters (for Conventional, Reflectorless, or Level
surveys).
6. For a Robotic Survey, choose the modem to be used and its
parameters, then tap Next (Figure 4-76 on page 4-59).
• Generic modems use a standard set of parameters: port, parity,
the number of data bits, the baud rate, and the number of stop
bits.
• Pacific Crest modems also need a channel and sensitivity to be
chosen (these parameters are selected by pressing the Configure
Radio button).
• The Satel modem also requires the model, the channel number,
and the frequency to be set. If necessary, use PCC protocol and
FEC mode. These parameters are selected on the Radio
Parameters screen opened by pressing the Configure Radio
button.

Figure 4-76. TS Radio

7. For the motorized instruments in the Conventional mode of

operation, check and enable the Enable Motor Turning box on
the Mode screen to turn the motor.

P/N 7010-0945 4-59

SSF_UM_um.book Page 60 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Figure 4-77. Mode

Also, the instrument can be set with auto tracking or auto aiming
tasks from the Auto Tracking drop-down list:
• The Auto Tracking mode causes the total station to track the
reflector while the surveyor moves from point to point.
• The Auto Tracking/Auto Aiming mode causes the instrument to
find the prism in the predefined region.
• The No Aiming/No Tracking mode disables the total station
operation program.
8. On the Search/Track screen (Figure 4-78), set the search
parameters for a Robotic Survey: the range of search along the
vertical and horizontal axes, pattern, track speed, sensitivity,
delay between the loss of signal and a new search start, turning
speed (measured in revolutions per minute) and the scan range
(the width of the signal), then tap Next.

4-60 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 61 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating Optical Configuration

Figure 4-78. Search/Track

9. On the Survey Parms screen, set the method for performing

measurements and tap Next (Figure 4-79 on page 4-62).
• For the Angle/Dist - Dir/Rev method, select the sequence for
measuring angles: FS is foresight point (the next occupation
point), BS is backsight point (the previous occupation point), and
Plunge is a rotation of the total station telescope and body by 180
degrees. These are used for reduction of angular errors. Also,
select the number measurement sets for the angles.
• To enable the reverse distance measurements, check the
corresponding field. These are used for the reduction of the
distance measurement errors.
• The Automatic Repetition of the measurements is available only
in the Robotic mode (for the motorized instrument).
• Insert the allowable tolerances for the measurements and enable
distance averaging (indicates if distance is measured using one
signal or computed as the average of several signals), if desired.

P/N 7010-0945 4-61

SSF_UM_um.book Page 62 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Figure 4-79. Survey Parms

10. In the next Survey Parms screen, set the following parameters
(Figure 4-80 on page 4-63):
• Meas Type – the order and the type of the measurements in one
set.
• EDM mode – determines the sensitivity of the distance
measurements; coarse or fine. Select Fine for a normal mode or
Coarse mode to measure in a shorter time. For a Sokkia
instrument the Coarse setting changes to Rapid.
• Backsight/Foresight PC (Prism Constant) – the parameter of the
prism, characterizing the difference between the reflection plane
and the center of the prism for backsight and foresight,
respectively.
• Point Guide – operates the tracking lights. Select the appropriate
prism mode: either Prism or Non-Prism. For a Sokkia
instrument, you can select from Prism, 360 Prism, Sheet and
Non-Prism.
• AutoTopo (only for the Robotic survey) – the parameters of the
automatic survey.
• If necessary, use the List button to edit the prism.

4-62 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 63 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating Optical Configuration

Figure 4-80. Survey Parms. Second Screen.

11. If needed, set the point increment value for Survey points. To
do this, select the Point Properties option from the Help Icon
menu in the upper-left corner of the Survey Parameters screen
(see Figure 4-22 on page 4-18).
12. Set the Stakeout Parameters in two Stk Params screens: the
Horizontal distance tolerance, reference direction, the rule for
generating the name and Note of the staked point (if necessary),
and the way the total station is to be turned towards the design
point. Tap Next (Figure 4-81).

Figure 4-81. Stakeout Parms

P/N 7010-0945 4-63

SSF_UM_um.book Page 64 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

The reference point for a Conventional Survey

coincides with the total station and for a Robotic
TIP T
survey, with the point where the controller is
located.

13. To display an icon for the staked point on the map, select the
Display option from the Help Icon menu in the upper-left
corner of the Stakeout Parameters screen. In the Staked Point
Icon screen, select the desired parameters for the icon (see
Figure 4-24 on page 4-20).
14. Select additional customizing parameters in the Miscellaneous
screen (Figure 4-82).

Figure 4-82. Miscellaneous

15. Tap the ok button to store the settings, return to the

Survey Style screen and continue with the configuration setup.
The name of the created configuration displays in the drop-
down menu in the Optical Config field.

4-64 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 65 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

Configuration Setup
Once the survey configuration has been saved, other job settings can
be selected by tapping Next on the Survey Style screen (Figure 4-83).

Figure 4-83. Select Survey Configuration

Coordinate System
1. On the Coordinate System screen, set the parameters of the
coordinate system used: the projection, the Datum, and/or
Geoid, then tap Next (Figure 4-84).

Figure 4-84. Coordinate System

P/N 7010-0945 4-65

SSF_UM_um.book Page 66 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

The NAD83 datum has three independent realizations in SSF with

respect to the WGS84 datum: NAD83, NAD83(ITRF96) and
NAD83_NO_TRANS to reflect the updates to these datums.
The original intent was for WGS 84 and NAD 83 to be identical. The
mathematical definition of the ellipsoids (WGS 84 and GRS 80)
differs slightly due to the choice of defining constants and number of
significant figures. The maximum discrepancy between a Cartesian
X,Y,Z coordinate projected onto both ellipsoids is 0.1 mm at 45
degrees latitude. So, for all intents and purposes the ellipsoids can be
considered to be identical.
Confusion arises when we start to talk about the realization of the
WGS 84 and NAD 83 datums. When NAD 83 was first realized in
1986 it used the same control stations as WGS 84, some of which
were Doppler stations, which were accurate to about one meter. At
this time you could consider the datums to be identical.
Since this time there have been several realizations of WGS 84, the
latest being WGS 84 (G1150), which was performed using data from
IGS tracking stations collected during GPS Week 1150. Recent
studies have shown that WGS 84 (G1150) is essentially identical to
the International Terrestrial Reference Frame of 2000 (ITRF00).
Also, during this time there have been no new realization of NAD 83.
What this means is that WGS 84 and NAD 83 can no longer be
considered identical and are in fact different by more than one meter.
This is because the WGS 84 datum has been updated over time using
GPS and the NAD 83 datum has remained constant since 1986.
However, most software manufacturers still consider WGS 84 to be
identical with NAD 83.
To be compatible with other manufacturers, Sokkia provides
transformation parameters from WGS 84 to NAD 83 where all the
parameters are zero. This means WGS 84 equals NAD 83. This set of
datum transformation parameters is called NAD 83 No_Trans.
Sokkia also provides another set of datum transformation parameters
called NAD 83 which reflects the updates to WGS 84. These
parameters are taken from the National Geodetic Survey.
Sokkia only uses the first seven parameters, three translations, three
rotations, and scale.

4-66 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 67 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

2. To manipulate projections/datums/geoids, tap the List

button (Figure 4-84 on page 4-65) in the corresponding field
(for these operations, see the sections below). For SPC27
projection, select the Use NADCON box to make coordinates
match the same in Corpscon if necessary.
3. If necessary, perform the Grid-to-Ground coordinate
transformation to produce near ground distance values by
checking and enabling the Use Grid to Ground check box (for
this operation, see the section below).

Adding a Projection
From the Coordinate System screen (Figure 4-84 on page 4-65),
select a projection from the drop-down list in the Projection field or
add a projection by tapping the List button next to the
Projection field.
1. On the Projections screen, highlight the desired projection
from the Predefined list (Figure 4-85).

Figure 4-85. Projections

2. Hit the Down Arrow button to insert the projection into the
Active list of projections (to delete the projection from the list,
use the Cross button).
3. Tap the ok button to see the added projection in the
Projections drop-down list of the Coord System screen.

P/N 7010-0945 4-67

SSF_UM_um.book Page 68 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

4. To manipulate the custom projections, tap the Custom button.

To create a custom projection , tap the Custom button in the
Projections screen (Figure 4-85 on page 4-67). The Custom
Projections screen displays and contains a list of custom grid
projections. Initially, this list is empty.

Figure 4-86. Custom Projections

• Tap the Add button. On the Custom Projection screen, enter the
name for the new custom grid system and select a sample
projection and datum from the lists of available types, enter the
region and any additional information (Figure 4-87). Tap Next.

Figure 4-87. Custom Projection

4-68 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 69 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

• On the next Custom Projection screen, enter the new projection

specifications depending on the selected sample projection.
The projection types available for selection are as follows:
• Albers Equal Area (orthembadic): conic projection.
• Cassini-Soldner: cylindrical projection.
• Double Stereographic: conformal azimuthal projection.
• Lambert: conformal conic projection.
• Oblique Mercator: conformal cylindrical projection.
• Stereographic: conformal azimuthal projection.
• Transverse Mercator: conformal cylindrical projection.
If the Transverse Mercator projection is selected for example, enter
the following parameters and tap the ok icon (see Figure 4-88):
• Central Meridian – longitude of the central meridian of a zone.
• Scale – scale factor on the central meridian.
• Lat0 – latitude of the origin of the projection.
• East0 – false Easting of the origin of the projection.
• North0 – false Northing of the origin of the projection.

Figure 4-88. New Projection Specifications

P/N 7010-0945 4-69

SSF_UM_um.book Page 70 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

The Latitudes are entered as a positive number in

the Northern Hemisphere, and as a negative number
TIP T
in the Southern Hemisphere. The Longitudes are
positive for Eastern directions and negative for
Western directions relative to the GMT line.

Adding a Custom Datum

1. To add a datum, tap the List button from the drop-down
list in the Datum field on the Coord System screen (Figure 4-84
on page 4-65). The Custom Datums screen displays
(Figure 4-89 on page 4-70).
2. On the Custom Datums screen, which is initially empty, press
the Add button (Figure 4-89).

Figure 4-89. Custom Datums List

3. On the next Custom Datums screen (see Figure 4-90 on

page 4-71), enter the name of the new custom datum and select
the ellipsoid for the datum from the drop-down list of the
Ellipsoid field. Tap Next.

4-70 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 71 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

Figure 4-90. Custom Datum Name

4. On the next Custom Datums screen (Figure 4-91), set offsets,

rotations, and scale for the new datum. Tap the ok button
when done.

Figure 4-91. Custom Datum Parameters

P/N 7010-0945 4-71

SSF_UM_um.book Page 72 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Adding a Geoid File

Geoid is a physical reference surface. Its shape reflects the
distribution of mass inside the earth. Geoid undulations are important
for converting GPS-derived ellipsoidal height differences to
orthometric height differences.
Install the geoid file on the controller prior to adding it to the list.
Global geoid files can be opened and truncated in Spectrum Link to
fit the file to the job area.
Some geoid files can be installed on the controller during SSF
installation. They are provided to the user with the SSF installation
program as ‘.gff’ files.
To add a geoid file to the drop-down list in the Geoids field of the
Coordinate System screen, tap the List button next to this field.
1. On the Geoid List screen, which is initially is empty, press the
Add button (Figure 4-92).

Figure 4-92. Geoid List

2. On the Add Geoid screen (Figure 4-93 on page 4-73):

• select the corresponding file format from Geoid 99/2003/2009,
Australian, Canadian 2000, Canadian 95, Geoid File Format,
Mexico 97, Sweden, Denmark, Dutch2004 Files, or Norwegian

4-72 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 73 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

• tap Browse and select the Geoid file from a controller directory
(downloaded beforehand), then view the boundaries of the geoid
application.
3. Press the ok button to return to the Geoid List screen
(Figure 4-92 on page 4-72) with the geoid file added. This list
corresponds to the Geoids drop-down list in the Coord System
screen.

Figure 4-93. Geoid Parameters

Grid / Ground Transformation

If necessary, perform the Grid / Ground coordinate transformation. A
ground projection is a grid mapping projection rescaled to convert
point coordinates to another reference surface (up to the average
project elevation or a point elevation) to produce near ground
distance values. The ground system can be rotated and shifted relative
to the grid system. The ground coordinates can be converted back to
the grid projection.
1. Check and enable the Use Grid/Ground box on the Coordinate
System screen, then tap the button.
The Grid/Ground Parameters screen displays (see Figure 4-94
on page 4-74). Select either Scale Factor, Average Job Height,
or Origin Point mode from the Parameters field to set up a
desired set of grid/ground parameters.

P/N 7010-0945 4-73

SSF_UM_um.book Page 74 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

2. In Scale Factor mode, set the following parameters:

• Combined Scale Factor for Grid to Ground or Ground to Grid
coordinate transformation direction.
• Azimuth Rotation, the angle that defines the reference direction
for ground azimuths. To compute the Azimuth Rotation value
using points in the job, tap the button.
• Offsets values of the grid origin along the North and East axes to
reduce ground coordinates to manageable values.

Figure 4-94. Grid to/from Ground - Scale Factor

The reference information at the bottom of the dialog goes about the
combined scale factor and the direction of transformation.
3. In Average Job Height mode, set the following parameters (see
Figure 4-95 on page 4-75):
• Average Job Height of the project for Grid to Ground coordinate
transformation to compute the elevation scale factor. An
elevation factor is determined by using a constant value for the
mean radius of the earth. An approximation of the earth’s radius
used in SSF is 6,371,000 meters.
• Map Scale Factor that defines how many Grid distance units
correspond to one distance unit on the Ellipsoid.
• Azimuth Rotation, angle between the axes of the grid and the
ground coordinate systems. This angle defines the reference

4-74 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 75 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

direction for ground. This value either has to be known for the
user or computed using points in the job (for this, tap the
button).
• Offsets values of the origin along the North and East axes to
reduce ground coordinates to manageable values.
The reference information at the bottom of the dialog goes about the
combined scale factor computed using the map scale factor and
elevation factor (computed using the average job height).

Figure 4-95. Grid to Ground - Average Job Height

4. In Origin Point mode, set the following parameters (see

Figure 4-96 on page 4-76):
• Azimuth Rotation, the angle between the axes of the grid and the
ground coordinate systems. This angle defines the reference
direction for ground. To compute the Azimuth Rotation value
using points in the job, tap the List button.
• Origin Point, a desired grid point from the job as the origin of the
ground coordinates for the Grid to Ground coordinate
transformation. It can be selected from the map or the list of
points in the job.
• Ground Point coordinates for the origin point.
• Combined Scale Factor for this mode is a calculated value. The
value (not equal to “1”) depends on the height of the origin point.

P/N 7010-0945 4-75

SSF_UM_um.book Page 76 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

The additional reference information at the bottom of the dialog goes

about the combined scale factor computed and the direction of
distance transformation.

Figure 4-96. Grid to Ground - Origin Point

Units
Set the distance and angle units of the job on the Units screen and tap
Next (Figure 4-97). For Optical mode, also select the temperature and
pressure units.

Figure 4-97. Set Distance and Angle Units

4-76 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 77 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

1. Select either Meters, IFeet (International Feet, 1 Ifoot = 0.3048

Meters), US Feet (1 USFt = 1200/3937 Meters); IFeet and
Inches, or US Feet and Inches (the latter two are calculated
taking into account that 1 Foot = 12 Inches).

If the selected units are US Feet, linear values can

be entered as meters, or international feet by
TIP T
appending “m” or “if” to the entered value.
If the selected units are in meters, then a linear
value in US Feet or International Feet is entered
by appending “f”or “if” to the end of the entered
value.
If the selected units are in International Feet, enter
linear values in meters or USfeet by appending
“m”or “f” to the entered value. The appended
characters “m”, “f”, or “if” are not case insensitive.
You can also enter “M”, “F”, or “IF”.
If the selected units are US or International Feet
and Inches, you can enter feet and inches in the
following formats:
- feet.inches.fracNumerator.fracDenominator
(displays as the next format)
- feet’inches’’fracNumerator/fracDenominator
(where the fracDenominator can be either 2, 4, 8, or
16)

2. Select either DMS (degrees, minutes, seconds), Grads (Gons),

Radians (for Cogo use only), or Mils (for Cogo use only). (360
degrees = 400 grads = 2 π radians = 6400 mils.)

Azimuth and distances can be entered as two points

separated by “-”, “,” or “;”. Certain angles can be
T
entered as three points separated by “-”, “,” or “;”.
TIP

For instance, a value of 100-101 indicates the

Azimuth or Distance from Point 100 to Point 101.

3. For raw measurements in Optical mode only, select either

Celsius (C), or Fahrenheit (F) units of temperature.

P/N 7010-0945 4-77

SSF_UM_um.book Page 78 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

4. For raw measurements in Optical mode only, select either

mmHg, hPa, inHg, or bbar units of atmosphere pressure.

Display
On the Display screen (Figure 4-98), select the Display parameters:
the type of Coordinates displayed, the plane coordinates order, the
reference direction for Azimuth and representation type and the
method for displaying position on the CenterLine (Station or
Chainage). If the Station is selected as representation type to display
position on the CL, set the Full Station value. Then tap Next.

Figure 4-98. Display

Alarms
On the Alarms screen, set alerts for various situations.
1. Check and enable the Audible Alarm field to enable a sound for
alarms in the Controller, Receiver, or Total Station
(Figure 4-99 on page 4-79).
2. Place the check marks, where necessary on the Controller,
GPS+ and Optical tabs to select alerts for various instruments
and situations: low power, memory limited, loosing/gaining
radio link, or fixed solution with GPS receiver, or tracking with
Robotic Total Station.

4-78 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 79 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

Figure 4-99. Alarms

3. Tap the ok button to save the settings for the newly

created job. The Connections screen displays (Figure 4-100) if
Prompt at startup is default.

Connections
1. Select the device type GPS (either base or rover) or Optical,
then tap Connect (Figure 4-100).

Figure 4-100. Connections

P/N 7010-0945 4-79

SSF_UM_um.book Page 80 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Setting Automatic Import of

Localization and Code Library
1. To set parameters for automatic import of global code library
and localization data from the previous job, tap the
Configure New Jobs icons. The New Jobs screen displays
(Figure 4-101 on page 4-80).
2. On the New Jobs screen, select the desired parameters from the
drop-down lists:
• For Import localization from previous job, select from Never
import localization data from the previous job, Always import,
and Prompt to import.
• For Import global code library to job, select from Never import
global code library to job, Always import, and Prompt to import.

Figure 4-101. New Jobs

4-80 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 81 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

Code Settings and Prompts

To set global parameters and prompts for codes, tap the icons
Configure Codes.
1. On the Code Settings tab select settings for codes and control
codes:
• Select Default New Type for code entry, either Point, Line, or
Area, or select Prompt to receive a prompt for creating a new
code upon saving points.
• Select either Codes or Notes for Data Entry in the field during
survey in the main Topo dialog (Figure 8-18 on page 8-20).
• Set a Code File to use the file’s codes and layers with the
currently selected job.

When using a Code File, the codes immediately

NOTICE become available for selection from the Code drop-
down list.
The layers from the Code File display in the Layer
list of the current job only as points are saved with
the file’s codes selected.

• Tap the Browse button to select an XML file to use for the Code
File above. Default code library (SSFDefCodeLib.xml) is

P/N 7010-0945 4-81

SSF_UM_um.book Page 82 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

installed automatically on SSF installation and can be set to the

Global Code Library.

Figure 4-102. Default Code Library File

• Check mark the Code with Description box to display

descriptions along with code names in the drop-down menu for
Code selection during survey.
• Check mark the Allow Custom box to disable using SSF linework
package. In this case, the user can enter any string to mark it as a
control code. SSF will not interpret these control codes.
• Check mark the Allow Persistent box to allow the control codes
to be persistent between recorded points and not cleared when
surveying. This option available, only if the Allow Custom
Control Code option is turned on above.

4-82 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 83 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

• When surveying, if the selected mode is either Line or Area, then

this option selects a Delimiter for entering control codes, along
with codes in a single field, separated by the delimiter.

Figure 4-103. Code Options

2. On the Code Prompts tab, set global prompts for code while
performing TS and GPS Surveys, Stakeout and COGO tasks.
Check mark a corresponding box to enable prompts for codes
(Figure 4-104 on page 4-83).

Figure 4-104. Code Prompts

P/N 7010-0945 4-83

SSF_UM_um.book Page 84 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Customizing Menus
1. Some rarely used functions are not displayed, but can be
enabled. To do this, tap the Configure Menus icons. The
Config Menus screen displays.

Figure 4-105. Config Menus

2. On the Config Menus screen (Figure 4-105), select the desired

menu from the Menu list and choose the necessary options
from the Sub Menu to Display list.

Setting Background Images

To position a geographic image under observed data on the map, use
the Background Images function.
1. To load an image, tap Edit Job Images.
2. On the Background Images screen (Figure 4-106) select the
image. It is possible to select multiple background images.
Using multiple background images is limited by the amount of
free space in the controller memory.

4-84 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 85 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

3. Tap Add to add the appropriate file to the list.

Figure 4-106. Select Background Images

To be imported into SSF correctly, any images need to be geo-

referenced. GeoTIFF images have their own geo-referenced data
while other images need a separate World file that references the
geographic location of the image. The World file must have the
filename extension associated with the image format (TFW, JGW
or BPW) and should be located in the same directory as the image
file.

To map a Background Image correctly, the image

NOTICE (it’s geo-reference point) should be in the job’s
current coordinate system or at least in a very
similar one (e.g., in a corresponding UTM zone).

If the selected image uses a World File, tap Properties to select

the projection in which the coordinates in the World File are
given.
4. To use a file once it is added, make sure the file is checked in
the list. Tap the ok button to open the selected file. If no
world file exists for the background image file selected, a
warning displays, and the Background Images screen will
appear again to select another file.

P/N 7010-0945 4-85

SSF_UM_um.book Page 86 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Global Settings
Set general settings in SSF if needed to use with the currently selected
job. Tap the Config Global icons.

Figure 4-107. Global Settings

1. Check and enable the Use Bold Font box to use the bold font
on the controller display to see more clearly.
2. Check and enable the Enable Job History box to save every
surveyor’s operation on the job in a history file.
3. The Prompt for Connection box is checked by default to
display the Connections dialog (Figure 4-100 on page 4-79);
uncheck the box if you want to enable auto connection with the
device.

Backup Jobs
To increase the reliability of work with jobs in SSF, a backup copy is
automatically created for the current job. This automatic renewal
occurs about every ten minutes (the corresponding message appears,
see Figure 4-108).
And it is safely stored with a new name, i.e., file_name!YYY-MM-
DD!.tsj.bak in a folder where the original *.tsj file is located.
SSF will create a separate *.bak file for the current job every time the
user opens the *.tsj file during the day with another date.

4-86 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 87 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

But there cannot be more than three such files. If the *.tsj file is
opened in subsequent days, the *.bak files previously formed will be
overwritten to the ones with the newer dates.

Figure 4-108. Job Backup in Progress

To change the folder for backup copies, tap the Config Backup
icons. The Backup Config screen displays (Figure 4-109).
• Check mark the Use custom box to activate a field below: either
type in a backup target folder or select it.
• The History field shows how many last copies will be daily
created (three copies by default).

P/N 7010-0945 4-87

SSF_UM_um.book Page 88 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Figure 4-109. Use Custom Destination

Configuring Stake Reports

If necessary, you can configure reports for staking.
1. Tap the Config Stake Reports icons. The Stake Report
Configurations screen displays a list of default styles of reports
(Figure 4-110).

Figure 4-110. Stake Report Configuration

4-88 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 89 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Configuration Setup

2. You can edit an existing configuration or create a new one.

Select the desired type of configuration and tap Edit or Add,
respectively. The Report Configuration screen displays
(Figure 4-111).

Figure 4-111. Edit Stake Report

3. On the Report Configuration screen:

• Edit the Name of the report and select the Report Type on staking
lines, points, roads, slopes, or surfaces from the drop-down list.
• Check corresponding boxes near the Items to show appropriate
information in the report.
• Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the items.
• Tap the Edit button if you want to edit the name of the
highlighted item. Alternatively you can just tap the item to open
the editable field.

P/N 7010-0945 4-89

SSF_UM_um.book Page 90 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Creating a New Job

Figure 4-112. Edit Item of Stake Report

4-90 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 5

Importing and
Exporting Data
SSF can import/export data from/to jobs, devices and different
formats. SSF supports all major file formats.

Importing Data
SSF can import points, codes and attributes, Code Libraries, Roads,
Cross Section Templates, Point Lists and Localization data from
another job, from a file, or from another controller device.

Import from Job

1. Tap Import From Job. The Select Job screen (Figure 5-1)
displays. Highlight the name of the job file in the Job List and
tap Select; or tap Browse to select the Job file from the disk.

Figure 5-1. Select Job

P/N 7010-0945 5-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

2. In the From <Job> screen (Figure 5-2) select whether points

are to be imported, and if necessary, filter the imported points
either by type, by range and code, or by type, range, and code.
Place appropriate check marks to import along with points
Code Library, Localization, Point Lists, Horizontal
Alignments, Vertical Alignments, X-Section Sets, or Roads.

Figure 5-2. Import from Job

3. Tap Settings to import points as either Design or Control.

Figure 5-3. Settings

5-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing Data

4. If By Type or By Type, Range and Code is selected in the

Points drop-down menu of the From <Job> screen (Figure 5-
2), select the types of points to be imported on the Point
Type(s) to Import screen (Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-4. Select Point Type(s) to Import

5. If By Range and Code is selected in the Points drop-down list

of the From <Job> screen (Figure 5-2 on page 5-2), on the
Points to Import screen, select the codes and/or the range of
points to be imported (Figure 5-5 on page 5-4).
To select codes, tap the Select button, check the codes
associated with the points to be imported in the Code screen,
and tap the ok button. The Range of Points sets a range of
point names that should be imported. The symbols ‘,’, ‘.’ or ‘;’
can be used to differentiate individual point names, whereas
the symbol ‘-’ is to be used for specifying a range.

P/N 7010-0945 5-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Figure 5-5. Points to Import

6. If All or None is selected in the Points drop-down list of the

From <Job> screen, based on the other selections in this
screen, tapping the Next button on subsequent pages will result
in appropriate screens being displayed.
7. On the Pt List to Imp screen (Figure 5-6) select the point lists to
import.

Figure 5-6. Select Point List(s) to Import

8. Tap Next if other data is chosen to import into the From <Job>
screen. The next screen opens to select other objects (horizontal

5-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing Data

alignments, vertical alignments, roads or x-section sets) which

are similar to the Pt List to Im screen (Figure 5-6 on page 5-4).
9. In the final screen for importing from a job, the Next button
will disappear. Tap the ok button to start the Import
process.
10. When names of these imported objects coincide with existing
ones in the current job, the Duplicate Objects screen
(Figure 5-7) issues a warning that prevents the loss of points,
roads, or point lists.

Figure 5-7. Duplicate <Objects>

Select either to overwrite, or to rename, or to save with prefix/suffix.

Then press Yes to accept the decision for one or for all similar cases.
Pressing Skip leaves such objects not imported.

The import process cannot skip duplicate templates.

NOTICE
These objects must be renamed.

P/N 7010-0945 5-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Import from Device

1. Tap Import From Device to import a job (or any other file)
from one controller to another.
On the Settings screen, select the means of communication,
then tap Next (Figure 5-8).

Figure 5-8. Import/Export Settings

2. Choose the location for the imported file, then tap the ok
button. The Select directory screen displays (Figure 5-9 on
page 5-6).

Figure 5-9. Select Directory

5-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing Data

3. Prepare the other controller device for the export process as

described in the “Export to Device” on page 5-19. Tap the ok
button on the Select File screen.

Import from File

1. Tap Import From File. On the From File screen select the
type of data to be imported, the type of file from which to
import data (Figure 5-10). If needed, check mark a box to set
distance/angle units. Then tap Next.

Figure 5-10. From File

2. Using the standard Windows® CE interface, browse for the file

to import from or type the name of the file, and tap the ok
button.

Points from Text File Formats

1. If data type is Points or Point Lists, select the point type to
import from the Data drop-down list (Figure 5-11). If the Text
file type is chosen, check the ASCII File Properties field
buttons, if necessary. These conditions use the same type
attributes and quotes for the text values.

P/N 7010-0945 5-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Figure 5-11. From Text File

2. Specify the format in which data is stored in the file

(Figure 5-12).

Figure 5-12. Text File Format

• Choose the delimiter between different fields.

• If a header is provided in the first row of the file, check the
appropriate field.
• Select the File Format (the order of the fields), using the
drop-down menu. Or create a new file format using the
procedure below.

5-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing Data

3. Tap Next to select the coordinate system of the data in the

imported file.
4. Tap the ok button to start the import process.
To customize the format, enter the order of data using the Custom
Style screen (Figure 5-13).
1. Tap Add Format on the Text File Format screen.
2. Select parameters from the Available list and tap the right
arrow button to move them to the Order list.
3. To arrange the options in sequence, use the up and down arrow
buttons. The order of items in the Order list should correspond
to that in the selected file.
4. Tap Save (Figure 5-13). The combination will display in the
Select File Format drop-down list on the Text File Format
screen.

Figure 5-13. Custom Style

P/N 7010-0945 5-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Points from AutoCAD DXF and AutoCAD 2000

Drawing Files
1. If the AutoCAD DXF or AutoCAD 2000 Drawing format is
selected, select the Point Type on the From File screen
(Figure 5-14).

Figure 5-14. From AutoCAD DXF

SSF only imports AutoCAD 2000 format DWG

NOTICE files. Support for DWG 2008 is optional and
selected during SSF installation.
SSF imports layers from DWG/DXF files, along
with the appropriate data types.

2. Tap the Settings button. On the Settings screen, select the

following drawing styles to represent points and lines
(Figure 5-15 on page 5-11).
• Check and enable the Import block base points box to import
central points in blocks as points.
• Check and enable the Load as background image box to load
data as background.

5-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing Data

Figure 5-15. Settings

Points from ESRI Shape

A shapefile is actually a set of several files: mandatory four files
(*.shp, *.shx, *.dbf, *.clf) and some optional files. A set is created for
forms lying on one layer and having the same code.
If the ESRI Shape format is selected for points import, SSF will
prompt to select only the file with “.shp” extension, other files are
picked up automatically.

When importing shapefiles you need to repeat the

TIP T import process for every desired code.

In addition SSF can optionally import a *.prj file associated with the
shapefile (*.shp) being imported.

The SHP support libraries are optional installation

NOTICE files, available for selection during install. They
require 4MB of storage and should not be used
where memory is limited. The additional support
files will be installed as a separate process after the
initial install of the program is completed.

P/N 7010-0945 5-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Points from TDS Format

Import points from the TDS format allows choosing to import points
as either Design or Control (Figure 5-16).

Figure 5-16. From TDS Coordinates

Tap Next to follow next screens with the help of the import wizard.

Importing Lines
SSF linework consists of lines and points, whereas imported linework
contains no points; it includes positions only (names start with a
question mark). Figure 5-17 on page 5-13 illustrates the contents of
the imported linework.
If the AutoCAD DXF or AutoCAD 200 Drawing format is selected
for lines import, the Settings button on the From File screen allows
choosing styles to represent points and lines.
• Import block base points – enable to import central points in
blocks as points.
• Load as background – enable to load data as background.

SSF only imports AutoCAD 2000 format DWG

NOTICE files. Support for DWG 2008 is optional and
selected during SSF installation.

5-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing Data

Figure 5-17. Edit Imported Linework

Importing Areas
For Area data, you can import data from ESRI Shape (*.shp).

Line and Area shape files are imported into the Line
NOTICE
and Area layers.

Importing Localization
Control Points are imported together with Localization data.

Importing Multiple Data Types

1. On the Data selection screen, select specific data type from the
appropriate file (Figure 5-18 on page 5-14).
2. Select an object to import and tap Next to start the import
process.

SSF imports layers to DWG/DXF files, along with

NOTICE
the appropriate data types.

P/N 7010-0945 5-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Figure 5-18. Import From LandXML

Importing Code Library

Code Library is a set of codes with attributes used in the job. You can
import code libraries from the formats: Topcon XML (*.xml),
Topcon Text (*.tdd), DBF (*.dbf), Topcon Text Custom (*.txt), or
Carlson (*.FCL).
All layers are automatically imported whether they are with codes or
not.
Topcon Text Custom format allows importing code library from a
comma delimited file.

Importing Roads
The header of the SSF Road format contains the starting azimuth if
the Road is not a straight line.

For details on the formats of the files from which

NOTICE SSF can import data, refer to the SSF Reference
Manual.

5-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 15 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

Exporting Data
SSF can export Points, Lines, Areas, Point Lists, Code Library, Raw
Data, Horizontal Alignments, Vertical Alignments, X-Section Sets,
Roads, X-Section Templates, Localization, Scanning Data, Road
Survey, Job History, TINs, Layer States, Stakeout Reports, and
Multiple Data to another job, to a file, and to another controller
device. Sessions can be exported to receivers (in GPS+ mode).

Export to Job
1. Select the Export To Job icons. On the Select Job screen,
highlight the destination job to export to and tap Select. If there
is no job in the Job List that you want, press the Browse button
to select a job from the disk (Figure 5-19).

Figure 5-19. Select Job

2. In the To <Job> screen select whether points are to be exported,

and if necessary, filter the exported points either by type, by
range and code, or by type, range, and code (Figure 5-20 on
page 5-16). Also, place appropriate check marks, if the
following data should be exported along with points: Code
Library, Localization, Point Lists, Horizontal Alignment,
Vertical Alignment, X-Section Sets or Roads.
3. Tap the Next button.

P/N 7010-0945 5-15

SSF_UM_um.book Page 16 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Figure 5-20. Export to Job

4. Use the Settings button to export points as either Design or

Control.
5. If By Type or By Type, Range and Code was selected in the
Points drop-down list, on the Point Type(s) to Export screen,
select the types of points to be exported (Figure 5-21).

Figure 5-21. Select Point Type(s) to Export

6. If By Range and Code was selected in the Points drop-down

menu, on the Points to Export screen, select the codes and/or
the range of points to be exported (Figure 5-22 on page 5-17).

5-16 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 17 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

Figure 5-22. Points to Export

7. To select codes, tap the Select button. Check mark the codes
associated with the points to be exported in the Code screen,
and tap he ok button. The Range of Points sets a range of
point names that should be exported. The symbols ‘,’, ‘.’ or ‘;’
can be used to differentiate individual point names, whereas the
symbol ‘-’ is to be used for specifying a range.

Figure 5-23. Select Code

P/N 7010-0945 5-17

SSF_UM_um.book Page 18 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

8. If All or None is selected in the Points drop-down list of the

To<Job> screen, based on the other selections in this screen,
tapping the Next button on the subsequent pages will result in
appropriate screens being displayed.
9. In the Point List(s) to Export screen select the point lists to
export (Figure 5-24).

Figure 5-24. Select Point List(s) to Export

10. Tap Next (if available) to choose other data to export

(horizontal alignments, vertical alignments, roads or x-section
sets) that is similar to the point lists selection. Once the button
becomes grayed out, tap he ok button to start the export
process.
11. When names of these exported objects coincide with existing
ones in the job, the Duplicate Objects screen issues a warning
that prevents the loss of points, roads, or point lists (Figure 5-25
on page 5-19).
12. Select either to overwrite, or to rename, or to save with prefix/
suffix. Then press Yes to accept the decision for one or for all
similar cases. Pressing Skip leave such objects not exported.

5-18 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 19 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

Figure 5-25. Duplicate <Objects>

Export to Device
1. Tap Export To Device.
2. On the (Import/Export) Settings screen (Figure 5-26), select
the means of connection using the Com Port drop-down list,
then tap Next. The Select file screen displays (Figure 5-26).

Figure 5-26. Import/Export Settings

P/N 7010-0945 5-19

SSF_UM_um.book Page 20 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

3. Choose the files to be exported.

Figure 5-27. Select File to Export

4. Prepare the other controller device for the export process as

described above in the Import section.
5. Tap he ok button to start the export process of the
selected file and to return to the main screen if it is successful.

Export to File
1. Tap Export To File icons.
In the To File screen, select the type of data to be exported and
the type of file to which to export the data (see Figure 5-28 on
page 5-21). Tap the Next button.

SSF can export data to DWG files only in

NOTICE
AutoCAD 2000 format.

2. For Points and Point Lists data types, if desired, check mark
the appropriate fields to choose the data being exported:
– Check and enable the Select Types of the Points box if not all
types of points should be exported. In this case the Point
Types to Export screen first displays.
– Check and enable the Use Filters box if filters (by code and
by range) should be used for exported points.

5-20 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 21 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

– Check and enable the Select File Units box to set units.

Figure 5-28. Export to File

Points to Topcon Text Custom

1. If data type is Points or Point Lists, select the point type to
export.
2. Check and enable the ASCII File Properties field boxes, if
necessary (Figure 5-29). These conditions use the same type for
the attributes and quotes for the text values.

Figure 5-29. To File

P/N 7010-0945 5-21

SSF_UM_um.book Page 22 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

3. Tapping the Next button opens the Point Type(s) to Export

(page 5-16) and the Point To Export (page 5-16) screens if the
respective fields have been checked.
4. When all data export conditions have been specified, a screen
to choose the file opens (Figure 5-30). Using the Windows CE
interface, browse for the file to export to or type the name of the
file, and tap the ok button.

Figure 5-30. Select the File

5. On the Text File Format screen, (Figure 5-31), specify data

format parameters in the file:

Figure 5-31. Text File Format

5-22 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 23 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

• Select the delimiting symbol (Delimiter) between the data in

the exported file; select either Space, Comma, Tabs, or Other
from the list.
• Check and enable the Header in First Row box, if a header is
provided in the first row of the file, check the appropriate
field.
• Select the File Style (the order of the fields), using the drop-
down list below, or create a new file format using the
procedure below.
6. Tap Next to select the coordinate system of the data in the
imported file.
7. Tap the ok button to start the export process.
To customize the file format, enter the order of data using the
Custom Style screen (Figure 5-32 on page 5-24).
1. Tap Add (Edit) Format on the Text File Format screen
(Figure 5-31 on page 5-22).
2. Select items from the Available list and tap the right arrow
button to move them to the Order list (Figure 5-32 on page 5-
24).
3. To arrange the options in sequence, use the up and down arrow
buttons. The order of items in the Order list should correspond
to that in the selected file.
4. Tap Save. The combination will display in the Select File
Format drop-down list on the Text File Format screen
(Figure 5-31 on page 5-22).

P/N 7010-0945 5-23

SSF_UM_um.book Page 24 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Figure 5-32. Custom Style

Points to Text Custom Report, Sokkia SDR and

Topcon 3DMC Project
Note that text custom report files cannot be imported back to SSF. If
one of these formats is selected, the To File screen contains the Code
Style button (Figure 5-33).

Figure 5-33. To Text Custom Report

1. Tap the Code Style button to select or create a desired format

for information on every point to arrange it on one line in the
exported file.

5-24 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 25 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

2. Tap the Next button to follow next screens which are similar to
those for the Topcon Text Custom format.

Points to AutoCAD DXF and AutoCAD 2000

Drawing
1. When exporting points to the AutoCAD DXF or AutoCAD
Drawing format, you can select an option not to export code
attributes on the To File screen (Figure 5-34).

Figure 5-34. AutoCAD DXF

2. Tap the Code Style button on the To File screen to set a format
for point properties (codes, control codes, strings, and notes) to
export to the file.
3. Tap the Settings button to select the desired drawing point style
to represent points in AutoCAD:
– select AutoCAD Points to represent points as positions
without icons and descriptions such as names, elevations,
codes and attributes.
– select AutoCAD Points with Text Fields to represent points
with descriptions such as names, elevations, codes and
attributes. Each description is given in text format and on a
separate layer.
Note that for this point style AutoCAD does not decode
descriptions for points, it only provides text fields for them.

P/N 7010-0945 5-25

SSF_UM_um.book Page 26 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

– select Carlson Point Blocks to represent points and

descriptions for them as block references.
– select SSF Point Blocks to represent points with the names as
block references.
4. If necessary, uncheck the Use 3D coordinates box not to use
3D coordinates.
5. You may want to set the height of text fonts to show the text in
AutoCAD. For this, check mark the Use text font height box to
open a field to manually/automatically enter the desired value
in CAD units. Then tap the ok button (Figure 5-35).

Figure 5-35. Settings

5-26 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 27 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

Points to ESRI Shape Format

When exporting points to the ESRI Shape format, check and enable
the Store Description as Attribute box on the To File screen to save
point descriptions as attributes in the file (Figure 5-36).

Figure 5-36. ESRI Shape

A shapefile is actually a set of several files: mandatory four files

(*.shp, *.shx, *.dbf, *.clf) and some optional files. A set is created for
forms lying on one layer and having the same code.
While exporting, SSF creates a set of four mandatory files for every
code and named by the given code in the same selected directory.
Also in this directory, a folder that contains all photo notes exported
with the points is created.
In addition SSF can optionally create a *.prj file associated with the
shapefile (*.shp) being exported. If this file is required, select the
corresponding option while installing SSF.

The SHP support libraries are optional installation

NOTICE files, available for selection during install. They
require 4MB of storage and should not be used
where memory is limited. The additional support
files will be installed as a separate process after the
initial install of the program is completed.

P/N 7010-0945 5-27

SSF_UM_um.book Page 28 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Points to TDS
When selected, the TDS Coordinate format demands points have only
numerical names. The To File screen (Figure 5-37) displays a number
at which SSF will start renaming points with alphanumeric names.

Figure 5-37. To TDS

Exporting Lines
SSF supports export of lines to the formats: Topcon Text Custom
(*.txt), Topcon 3D (*.ln3), AutoCAD DXF (*.dxf), AutoCAD
Drawing (*.dwg), ESRI Shape (*.shp), LandXML (*.xml), KOF
(*.kof), Topcon 3D Linework (*.ln3), Microstation 95/ISFF
(*.dgn), MX GENIO (*.txt), SBG Pxy (*.PXY) or SBG Geo (*.Geo).
The options on the To File screen depend on the format selected for
export of lines from the current job. These options are much similar to
those available for export of Points data.
For most formats you can:
• check and enable the Select File Units option to select units for
the data exported. Depending on the data and format selected,
you can set only distance, or distance and angle units if they are
available for setting.

5-28 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 29 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

• check and enable the Export Areas as Lines option if areas

should be exported as lines.

Figure 5-38. Lines to File

When exporting Lines to AutoCAD DXF or AutoCAD 2000 Drawing

files:
• Use the Code Style button to set a format for line properties
(codes, control codes, strings and notes) to export to the file.
• Use the Settings button to select drawing styles to represent lines
in AutoCAD:
– select AutoCAD Lines to represent lines without names.
– select AutoCAD Lines with Text Fields to represent lines,
lines names, and vertex elevations.
– select SSF Line Blocks to represent lines with the lines
names as block references.
6. If necessary, uncheck the Use 3D coordinates box not to use
3D coordinates.
• You may want to set the height of text fonts to show the text in
AutoCAD. For this, check mark the Use text font height box to
open a field to manually/automatically enter the desired value in
CAD units. Then tap the ok button (Figure 5-39).

P/N 7010-0945 5-29

SSF_UM_um.book Page 30 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Figure 5-39. Settings for Lines

Exporting Raw Data

SSF supports export of raw data to the formats:
LandXML (*.xml), Topcon FC-5 (*.fc5), Topcon GTS210/310/10
(*.raw), Topcon GTS-6 (*.gts6), Topcon FC-6/GTS-7 (*.gts7),
Topcon GTS-7 +(*.gts7), SurvCE (*.RW5), TDS (*.RAW), MOSS
Survey (*.txt), Field Book (*.fbk), TVF (*.tvf), TVF with Code Style
(*.tvf), KOF (*kof), Berlin GNSS-Messprotocoll (*.txt) or Berlin
GNSS- Mittelwerte (*.txt), Sokkia SDR33 (*.sdr).
When choosing LandXML, Topcon FC-6/GTS-7, Topcon GTS-7 +,
SurvCE, TDS Raw Data, Field Book, KOF or Sokkia SDR33 format
files, select the type of raw data to export: either Export TS Raw Data
and/or Export GPS Raw Data.
In addition, being exported to TDS Raw Data file, raw data can be
saved in a format compatible with the FBK format. Selection of the
FBK Compatible option is available if control codes are saved as
notes. When selected, the FBK Compatible option demands points
have only numerical names. The screen displays a number at which
SSF will start renaming points with alphanumeric names (Figure 5-
40).

5-30 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 31 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

Figure 5-40. Export Raw Data To TDS Raw Data

Code, Attributes, String, Note, Control Code, Photo

NOTICE Name and Control flag are also exported with GPS
and TS raw data into LandXML.

The formats Topcon FC-5, Topcon GTS210/310/10, Topcon GTS-6,

and MOSS Survey are allowed for only TS raw data export.
The formats TVF, TVF with Code Style, Berlin GNSS-
Messprotocoll or Berlin GNSS- Mittelwerte provide the export of
only GPS data.

Raw Data To Topcon FC-6/GTS-7 and GTS-7+

When using Topcon FC-6/GTS-7 (*.gts7), Topcon GTS-7 +(*.gts7)
format, you are able to automatically replace all alphanumeric names
with numeric ones during GPS Raw data export.
Check mark the Rename alphanumeric point option to enable
renaming points with alphanumeric names for numeric ones. Putting
a tick in this box will show the Alphanumeric Points will be
Renumbered Starting field with a starting figure for numbering (see
Figure 5-41 on page 5-32).

P/N 7010-0945 5-31

SSF_UM_um.book Page 32 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Figure 5-41. To Topcon FC-6/GTS-7

Raw Data To SurvCE

When using SurvCE (*.RW5) format, two additional options are
available for selection (see Figure 5-42).

Figure 5-42. To SurvCE

1. Check mark the Select Additional Point Types box to enable

storing Design, Control, COGO and/or Manually entered points
during export of raw data (Figure 5-43).

5-32 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 33 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

2. Export GPS points as SP points – check mark this box to save

GPS points as manually entered points (Store Points in the
Carlson SurvCE RW5 format).

Figure 5-43. Points Types To Export

Raw Data To Sokkia SDR33

When using Sokkia SDR33 (*.sdr) format, you are able to choose TS
and DL data, and/or GPS raw data to export (Figure 5-44). You can
set file units and export points as manually entered:

Figure 5-44. To Sokkia SDR33

Resection, Stakeout and Topography data are exported to this format.

P/N 7010-0945 5-33

SSF_UM_um.book Page 34 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Exporting Localization
You can export Localization data to the following formats:
Topcon 3DMC (*.gc3), Topcon 3DMC Project (*.tp3), TDS
(*.RAW) and Carlson (*.loc).
These formats allow only WGS84 -> Local type of localization (for
details, see “Localization” on page 8-2).
Control Points are exported together with Localization data.

Export of Localization data to these formats is also

NOTICE
available through the Localization screen.

Exporting Job History

You can export Job History data to CSV (Comma delimited) (*.csv),
and Text report (*.txt) files.
The CSV file contains information on all operations performed in the
job and the Text Report contains data about total station points and
resection.
The Job History file is formed if the Enable Job History box is check
marked on the Global Settings screen.

Exporting TINs
SSF stores surfaces in TN3 files in the DTM directory. Select a
desired TN3 file to export AutoCAD DXF (*.dxf), AutoCAD
Drawing (*.dwg), or LandXML (*.xml) files.

Exporting Multiple Data

For Multiple data, you can export to the following formats:
Topcon Text Custom (*.txt), AutoCAD DXF (*.dxf), AutoCAD
Drawing (*.dwg), ESRI Shape (*.shp), LandXML (*.xml), KOF
(*.kof), Microstation 95/ISFF (*.dgn), MX GENIO (*.txt), SBG
Pxy (*.PXY), or SBG Geo (*.Geo).
Each format is intended for storing a certain data group. Options
specific for every data type in this group will be presented for
Multiple data on the To File screen.

5-34 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 35 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Exporting Data

For details on the formats of the files to which SSF can export data,
refer to SSF Reference Manual.

Exporting GPS Sessions to the

Receiver
1. This function is available in PP Static survey mode.
To export the GPS session to the receiver, establish a
connection between the controller and the applicable receiver,
then tap Export Sessions (Figure 5-45).

Figure 5-45. Job Session

2. On the Sessions screen (Figure 5-45), select the sessions to

export in the left panel and tap the button. The sessions to
be exported are displayed in the right panel.
3. Check and enable the Goto sleep mode box to put the receiver
into sleep mode.
4. If it is necessary to edit the sessions, select the Edit Session
option from the Help Icon menu in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
5. Tap the Export button. The session will be transmitted to the
receiver.

P/N 7010-0945 5-35

SSF_UM_um.book Page 36 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Importing and Exporting Data

Notes:

5-36 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 6

Storing Data
All the data used in the SSF application is stored in a database. The
types of data stored include points, codes, layers, roads, linework, raw
data, and survey sessions for post-processing.

To edit any object properties, double-click on the

TIP T object or select the object and tap the Edit button.

Editing Points
To edit the job points, tap Edit Job Points. The Points screen
displays (Figure 6-1).

Figure 6-1. Points

1. To edit a point, either double-tap the point or select from the list
and tap the Edit button. Enter all necessary changes and tap the
ok button to save the changes.

P/N 7010-0945 6-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

2. To find a point by name, tap the Find by Point button on the

Points screen and insert the whole name or a part of the name
(in the latter case, select the Match partial name field). Tap
Search. The first point satisfying the search criterion is
highlighted in the list on the Points screen. Tap the Find Next
button to find another point with the same name.
3. To find a point by code, tap the Find by Code button on the
Points screen and select the code from the drop-down list (in
the latter case, select the Match partial name field). Tap
Search. The first point satisfying the search criterion is
highlighted in the list on the Points screen. Tap the Find Next
button to find another point with the same code.
4. On the Point Info tab, enter new information on the point: the
name, code, and note if preferred (Figure 6-2). The screen will
auto-hide and show the string input box based on the code type.
All line and area codes will display the string field while all
point codes will hide the string field. Code needs to be defined
at the time it is entered if it is not an existing code.

Figure 6-2. Enter New Point Information

• Use the icon next to the Attributes List icon to add points
with Line and Area codes the end/start of a line and to insert a
point to a line out of sequence.
5. To set the code and attributes available for the code chosen, tap
the Attributes List icon (Figure 6-3 on page 6-3)

6-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Points

• On the Point Attributes screen, select the desired code from

the drop-down list. A symbol will show the code entity type
( Point, Line, or Area).
• Set one or two control codes in the lower field from the
available ones for a Code Style of Line or Area.

The Control Code is a special type of code that is

NOTICE used by the graphic tool for the interpretation of
survey results.

The supported control codes (AS, AE, C, R) control line behavior

when creating arcs, closure of lines, and rectangles respectively.
The AS control code indicates the start of an arc, and the AE control
code indicates the end of the arc. Arc parameters are determined
using additional points in the line.
To use your own control codes, check and enable the Allow Custom
Control Code box on the Global screen (Figure 4-107 on page 4-86).
In this case, you can enter any string to mark it as a control code, SSF
will not interpret these control codes.

Figure 6-3. Point Attributes

• The field, marked by the sign, is used for entering a string

to generate a line for a Code Style of Line or Area. Code
Style is set when editing the code.

P/N 7010-0945 6-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

• The lower field shows the available attributes. Tap on the

attribute to provide a field to enter its value.
• Tap the Properties button to view the ranges for the
attributes. Attributes can only be added on the Feature-
Attributes screen when adding a code.
• Tap the Repeat button to erase the entered values.
• Tap the Default button to set default values.
• Tap the Multiple Codes button to edit multiple codes and
strings. Multiple codes and strings associated with a point
make the point a part of numerous lines.
6. On the Layer/Style tab (Figure 6-4), select the layer that the
point will be stored to and the plotting properties to represent
the point on the selected layer. (If needed, tap the List
button to edit layers.)

Figure 6-4. Set Layer and Point Style

7. On the Photo Note tab (see Figure 6-5 on page 6-5), add a
photo comment on the point.
• Tap the Add/Edit button to open the Browse screen to select
the image or to use the camera on GMS-2, GMS-2 Pro or
GRS-1 to Capture a new picture).
• To erase the image, use the Delete button.

6-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Points

Figure 6-5. Add Photo Note

8. If the point is contained in multiple point objects, these points

will display in the Check Points tab on the Edit Point screen.

Figure 6-6. Check Points

9. When editing a point which has a station available for

Weighted averaging, the WA tab will display on the Edit Point
screen. The WA tab displays coordinate residuals of the check
point. Tap the Use In WA/Exclude from WA button to control
either to use or not to use the station as a weighted average (see
Figure 6-7 on page 6-6).

P/N 7010-0945 6-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

Figure 6-7. Weighted Average

10. To add a point manually, tap the Add button on the Points
screen. If it is necessary to use the point as the Control point,
check mark this box.
11. To enter a PTL point, turn on the PTL Mode using the Help
Icon menu in the top-left corner of the Points screen. When
adding or editing a PTL point, insert the starting and ending
reference points and the PTL offsets: offset from the starting
point along the reference line, horizontal offset from the
reference line, and the height offset with respect to the starting
point (Figure 6-8).

Figure 6-8. Edit PTL Point

6-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Points

Storing Points
You can store points in the SSF database as stand-alone points,
linework, and open polylines or areas (closed polylines) by using an
appropriate Code Style for these points.

Stand-alone Points
Points which have no codes, or have codes of the Point type but no
strings associated with the codes, are simply stored as points
(Figure 6-9).

Figure 6-9. Code of Point Type

The map shows the points as stand-alone in the selected style

(Figure 6-10).

Figure 6-10. Map View for Stand-alone Points

P/N 7010-0945 6-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

Linework
To store the points that will be connected to form a linework, select
the same unique combination of codes and strings. Select the codes of
the Line type to use for such points (Figure 6-11).
1. All points with the same code-string combination are connected
in the order of measurement to form a line.
2. Points can also be associated with multiple codes and strings,
thus making the point a part of numerous lines.

Figure 6-11. Code of Line Type

The map shows the points connected into a line in the selected style
(Figure 6-12).

Figure 6-12. Map View for Line Points

6-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Points

Linework Package
Additional manipulations of linework can be performed using control
codes for the points with the same code-string combination. Up to
two control codes can be specified for every code associated with a
point to store the points which will be connected to form open or
closed polylines. Select the codes of the Line type to use for such
points.
The supported control codes of AS, AE, C, and R control line
behavior by allowing creation of arcs, closure of lines and creation of
rectangles, respectively. The delimiter is set in the Global Code
Options screen (see Figure 4-107 on page 4-86).

Figure 6-13. Code of Line Type with Control Code

1. The AS control code indicates the start of an arc; the AE

control code indicates the end of the arc. Arc parameters are
determined by the presence of additional points in the line.
• These points can create the line segment with the arc start/or
end point which will act as the tangent to the arc.
• If only one point is between the arc start and end points, the
arc is formed such that all the three points lie on the arc. If
there are two, or more than two points, between the points
with the AS and AE control codes, the points are all
connected by straight line segments.

P/N 7010-0945 6-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

2. The R control code is applied to the third point of a three point

polyline, and results in the automatic creation of a fourth point
of a parallelogram whose diagonal is specified by the first and
the third point (Figure 6-14).
3. When the C control code is applied to a point, it connects it to
the starting point of the line, thus closing the line.
The map shows the points connected into a line in the selected style.

Figure 6-14. Map View for Line Pints with Control Codes

SSF will not use this linework package if the Allow Custom Control
Code box on the Global screen is check marked (see Figure 4-107 on
page 4-86). In this case, the user can enter any string to mark it as a
control code. SSF will not interpret these control codes.

6-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Points

Area
Areas are simply closed lines formed by points with the codes of the
Area type and the same code-string combination (Figure 6-15).

Figure 6-15. Code of Area Type

The map shows the points connected into a line and the area that can
be filled with the selected style (Figure 6-16).

Figure 6-16. Map View for Area Points

P/N 7010-0945 6-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

Editing Codes
To edit codes and attributes, tap Edit Job Codes. Codes already in
use cannot be edited or deleted. The Code - Attributes screen displays
(Figure 6-17).

Figure 6-17. Code - Attributes

1. To add a code, tap the Add button on the right side of the
screen. The Code screen displays.
• Enter the code name and description (if needed).
• Select the type of code (from Point, Line, Area). A symbol
will show the code type ( Point, Line, or Area).
Select the layer that the code will be stored to. Set the Code
Style to represent points, lines and areas with this code on the
selected layer (Figure 6-18 on page 6-13). On the Attributes
tab, select a radio button for the prompt for code at the
beginning of a line or at every point along the line. Tap the ok
button.
2. To define the attributes for the new code, select the code and
tap the Add button on the right side of the screen. Set the name,
type, and parameters of the attribute for the code on the
Attributes screen (Figure 6-18 on page 6-13). Attribute type
indicates whether attribute values can be set as boolean True or
False, or selected from a list of available values, or are

6-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Codes

alphanumeric strings, integers or real numbers. Check and

enable the Required box to always use the default value of the
code. Tap the ok button.

Figure 6-18. Edit Codes / Attributes

3. To edit a code or attribute, double-tap the object or select it and

tap the corresponding Edit button (Figure 6-17 on page 6-12).
In the Code or Attribute screen, make changes and tap the ok
button (Figure 6-18).
4. To delete a code or attribute, highlight it in the list and tap the
corresponding Del button (Figure 6-17 on page 6-12). Codes
being used in points and their corresponding attributes cannot
be deleted.
5. To export the code library to the selected file format, select the
Export To File option (Figure 6-19 on page 6-14) from the
Help Icon menu in the upper-left corner of the Code -
Attributes screen (Figure 6-17 on page 6-12).

P/N 7010-0945 6-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

Figure 6-19. Export to Code Library

Editing Point Lists

To work with Point Lists, tap Edit Job Point Lists.
1. To add a point list, tap the Add button on the List of Pt Lists
screen (Figure 6-20).

Figure 6-20. List of Point Lists

6-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 15 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Point Lists

2. To edit a point list, select the point list and tap the Edit button
on the List of Pt Lists screen. In the Edit Point List screen
displays (Figure 6-21) and shows the Point List Name and
selects the points for the list.

Figure 6-21. Add Point List – Point List Tab

Adding a point to the Point List can be performed in two ways; either
through the map or through the Sel Pts button (Figure 6-21).
To add a point through the map, do the following:
1. Tap the plot on the right. A large Map screen opens.
2. Select the points by tapping them on the map - the two
consequently tapped points will be connected with a line.
3. Tap Close.
To add a point through the Sel Pts button, do the following:
1. Tap the Sel Pts button. A floating menu of six items display.
Select one of six ways of adding points.
• By Range – When specifying the range of points, the symbols
‘,’, ‘.’ or ‘;’ should be used to separate the names of the points
to be selected. The symbol ‘-’ can be used between two point
names when the two points, and all the points between them
are to be selected.
• By Code – All the points with the codes checked here will be
selected.

P/N 7010-0945 6-15

SSF_UM_um.book Page 16 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

• By CodeString – All the points with the highlighted code

with the Strings checked here will be selected.
• By Radius – By specifying the center point and the radius, all
the points that lie within the area are selected.
• From Map – The points can be selected from the Map screen
as described above.
• From List – Desired points can be selected from a list of
available points.
2. Repeat actions until all the points are added to the list.
3. Use the arrow buttons to modify the order of points in the list,
and the delete button to remove points from the list.
4. Tap the ok button.

Editing Layers
The “layers” in a SSF job can be thought of as overlapping sheets of
paper containing different drawing elements. Each layer is associated
with a definite set of points, codes, lines, and alignments. When
creating a layer, it can be either shown or hidden (that is, displayed or
not displayed).
Each new job contains a special Zero (“0”) layer. By default, all job
objects will be stored to this layer. Layer 0 cannot be deleted or
renamed.
Tap Edit Job Layers to display the Layers screen (Figure 6-22 on
page 6-17).

6-16 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 17 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Layers

Figure 6-22. Layers

1. To add a layer, tap the Add button on the Layers screen. The
Add Layer screen displays.
2. On the Add Layer screen, enter the layer’s parameters and tap
the ok button. The layer will be included in the list of
layers.
3. To delete a layer, select it from the list of layers and tap Del.
4. Tap on the icon to list the layers in ascending or descending
running order. After tapping in the Name header of the table,
the icon will toggle to the Name column to set the layers in
ascending or descending order of names.
5. Use the arrow buttons to modify the order of layers in the list,
and the Ins button to add a layer and insert it below the
currently selected layer.
6. To turn on/off the visibility of selected or all Layers, tap on the
corresponding button On/Off or All On/All Off.
7. To edit a layer, either double-tap the layer or select it on the
Layers screen and tap Edit. On the Edit Layer screen
(Figure 6-23 on page 6-18), change the layer’s parameters as
needed and tap the ok button.

P/N 7010-0945 6-17

SSF_UM_um.book Page 18 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

• On the Layer tab, enter a new layer name, check and enable
the Visible box to show the layer on the map, and enter any
additional information in the Note field (Figure 6-23).

Figure 6-23. Edit Layer

• On the Style tab (Figure 6-24), define the plotting style

properties for the points, lines, and areas of the layer.

Figure 6-24. Edit Layer Style

8. To view objects on the existing layer, tap on the Objects tab

(Figure 6-25 on page 6-19).

6-18 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 19 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Linework

Figure 6-25. Layer Objects

Editing Linework
Linework is provided in the points which are connected to form open
or closed polylines. For details, see “Storing Points” on page 6-7. To
edit lineworks, select the Edit Job Lineworks icons.

Figure 6-26. Edit Linework

1. On the Linework screen, tap the Add button to create new

linework. The Edit Line screen displays (Figure 6-26 on
page 6-19).

P/N 7010-0945 6-19

SSF_UM_um.book Page 20 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

2. To delete the linework from the list, tap the Delete button
(Figure 6-26 on page 6-19).
3. To edit the properties of a linework, either double-tap or
highlight the linework in the list and tap the Edit button
(Figure 6-26 on page 6-19).
4. On the Points in Line tab of the Edit Line screen, change the
name of the linework if necessary (Figure 6-27).
• To change the order of the points, use the up and down
arrows.
• To view information on a point, select the point in the list and
tap Point Info.
• To add points to the selected/created linework, tap the down
arrows next to the Sel Pts button in the lower right-hand
corner. Select the appropriate parameter from the Sel Pts pop-
up menu.

Figure 6-27. Edit Line

5. On the Layer/Style tab of the Edit Line screen (Figure 6-28 on

page 6-21), set layer and plotting properties to use to display
the points and lines on the map and tap the ok button.

6-20 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 21 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Areas

Figure 6-28. Edit Line/Point Style

Editing Areas
Area is bound with a closed line. Line nodes (points) have the same
code of area type to form an area boundary. To edit lineworks, tap
Edit Job Area. The Area screen displays (Figure 6-29).

Figure 6-29. Select Area

1. On the Area screen, tap the Add button to create a new area.
2. To delete the area from the list, tap Delete (Figure 6-29).

P/N 7010-0945 6-21

SSF_UM_um.book Page 22 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

3. To edit the properties of an area, either double-tap or highlight

the area in the list and tap Edit. The Edit Area screen displays
(Figure 6-30).
4. On the Points in Area tab, change the name of the area if
necessary.

Figure 6-30. Edit Area

5. To change the order of the points, use the up and down arrows.
6. To view information on a point, select the point in the list and
tap Point Info.
7. To add points to the selected/created area, tap the menu in the
lower right corner. Select the appropriate parameter from the
Select Points pop-up menu.
8. In the Layer/Style tab of the Edit Area screen, set layer and
plotting properties to use for display the points, line and area on
the map and tap the ok button.

6-22 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 23 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Operating Raw Data

Operating Raw Data

Tap Edit Job Raw Data. The Raw Data screen displays
(Figure 6-31) and reflects all the collected measurements. In GPS+
mode, this screen also displays the coordinates of the base and the
vector of the stored points from the rover to the base.

Figure 6-31. Raw Data

1. To move the cursor to the first or last point, tap the First and
Last buttons.
2. To find a point, tap the Find Point button and fill out the fields
in the Find by Point screen. The point can be found by name or
a part of its name.
3. To find a point by code, tap the Find Code button and select
the code in the Find by Code screen.
4. To find the next point that satisfies the same conditions as the
previous found point, tap the Find Next button.
5. To edit the raw data point, tap the Edit button. The Edit Raw
Data screen displays.
6. On the Edit Raw Data screen (Figure 6-32 on page 6-24), enter
additional notes for a point by typing the note in the suggested
field. The appearance (parameters) of this screen varies based
on the type of raw data being edited. (Note that editing Ant Ht,
HR & HI values, azimuth, etc., will not immediately
recompute coordinates.)

P/N 7010-0945 6-23

SSF_UM_um.book Page 24 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

7. To recompute the point coordinates, tap the Recompute button

on the Raw Data screen.
8. To toggle between displaying GPS+ raw data and TS raw data,
select the Show Raw GPS+/TS option from the Help Icon
menu in the upper-left corner of the screen.

Figure 6-32. Edit Raw Data

6-24 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 25 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing GPS Sessions

Editing GPS Sessions

To create or edit sessions (only in GPS+ mode) of automatic survey
for post-processing, tap Edit Job Sessions.

Figure 6-33. Session Edit

1. To create a new session, tap the Add button on the Sessions

panel (Figure 6-33). The Session Setup screen displays.
2. On the Session Setup screen (Figure 6-34), enter or select
session settings parameters.

Figure 6-34. Session Setup

P/N 7010-0945 6-25

SSF_UM_um.book Page 26 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

Enter the site name, the type of the survey, the time (in local time)
and date of the start and end of session, the interval between
measurements, minimum number of satellites needed for the
survey and the value and type of the antenna height. Then tap the
ok button to return to the Sessions screen (Figure 6-33 on
page 6-25).
3. To add a receiver, tap the Add button on the right side of the
screen.
4. Enter the name of the receiver in the Receiver Name dialog
box. Then tap the ok button.
5. To hide/display the session plans of the receiver, tap on the “-/
+” sign located near the receiver name to collapse/expand the
tree node (Figure 6-33 on page 6-25).
6. To put a session to the session plan of the receiver, highlight the
desired session in the left panel and check the necessary
receiver on the right and tap the button (Figure 6-33 on
page 6-25).
7. To edit the session, select it in the left panel and tap the Edit
button (Figure 6-33 on page 6-25).
8. To delete the session from the sessions list or the receiver, use
the button (Figure 6-33 on page 6-25).
9. Tap the ok button to save the changes and close the
screen.

6-26 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 27 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Objects from the Main Map

Editing Objects from the

Main Map
Editing objects in the job can be accessed either from the Edit Job
menu or from the Main Map.
To open the Main Map, tap the Map icon.
1. When in the Main Map (Figure 6-35), tap the desired object to
highlight it. Then hold the stylus on the selected object for a
while until a pop-up menu displays. The menu options depend
on the object selected.

Map Icon

Figure 6-35. Editing from the Main Map

2. To select multiple objects, tap the toolbar icon and extend

a square window from right to left to include the desired
objects. These objects can either be deleted or added to a Layer.

P/N 7010-0945 6-27

SSF_UM_um.book Page 28 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Storing Data

Notes:

6-28 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 7

Designing Roads
Designing a road is performed by establishing numerically known
station points along a center line of the proposed route (horizontal
alignment). To furnish data for estimating volumes of earthwork, a
profile is run along the center line (vertical alignment) and the road
surface is defined.
There are two definitions of the road in SSF where:
1. The road surface is described with Cross Section Set, and the
main alignment is the center line of this surface. Cross Section
Set is grouped together cross profiles, taken along lines passing
through each station and at right angles to the center line (cross
sections).
2. The road surface is described with String Set, and the main
alignment may not be the centerline of the physical road
surface but a center line marking the center of a road
construction project. String Set is a set of road Strings, made
up of paired horizontal and vertical alignments.
The horizontal alignment can be designed by sections described
through lines, spirals, arcs and intersection points. Intersection point
is defined as the intersection of the two lines tangential to the
'incoming' and 'exiting' spirals, or to the central curve at the PC and
PT points, if spirals are not specified.
The vertical alignment can be described through vertical grades and
parabolas, or long sections.
The cross section can be described using templates.
To design a road, select the Edit Roads icon in the main menu. Road
designing consists of designing a road as a whole and designing each
component of the road: horizontal alignments, vertical alignments,
cross section sets or string sets, and cross section templates.

P/N 7010-0945 7-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

Editing Roads
To edit a road, tap Edit Roads Roads.
1. On the Roads screen either double-tap the road or tap the Edit
button. The Edit Road screen displays (Figure 7-2).

Figure 7-1. Roads

Double-tapping a plot on any edit screen opens a

TIP T greater map.

2. On the Alignment tab of the Edit Road screen, set the name and
select the layer and the alignments, then open the Surface tab.
• If needed, change the layer from the drop-down list to locate the
road. Select the layer from the Layer drop-down list, or use the
button to edit layers. (For details refer to “Editing Layers”
on page 6-16).
• Select a pre-defined horizontal alignment from the Hz Alnt
drop-down list to use in designing the road. Use the List
button to edit horizontal alignments. (For details refer to “Editing
Horizontal Alignments” on page 7-5).
This Horizontal Alignment defines the stationing for the road and
must be set for either way of creating a road: with Cross Section
Set or String Set.

7-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Roads

• Select a pre-defined vertical alignment from the Vt Alnt

drop-down list to use in designing the road. Use the List
button to edit vertical alignments. (For details refer to “Editing
Vertical Alignments” on page 7-12).
This Vertical Alignment defines the vertical center alignment for
the road only if Cross Section Set is being used.
• Set the starting station with distance to it, or the starting chain
distance, depending on a selection made on the Display screen.
• Set the interval between the station points where road related
computations are made.

Figure 7-2. Edit Road Alignment

3. On the Surface tab of the Edit Road screen, define the road
surface (Figure 7-3 on page 7-4).
• Select a way of describing the road surface: with a set of cross
sections (X-Sec Set) or a set of strings (String Set). Select a pre-
defined set from the drop-down menu. Use the button to
edit corresponding sets (see “Editing Cross-Section Sets” on
page 7-21 and “Editing String Sets” on page 7-23).
• Set limits along the road for the width of a cross section
(Working Corridor), to only include those strings inside. Enter
two offsets from the centerline: offsets to the Left (near to the
centerline) and Right (far from the centerline) sides of the

P/N 7010-0945 7-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

corridor. The value entered in the Left field must be more than in
the Right field.

Figure 7-3. Edit Road Surface

• Tap the ok button to save the road file and return to the
Roads screen (Figure 7-1 on page 7-2).
4. After the road is edited, calculate the road points using the
Calculate Road Points option from the Help Icon menu in the
upper-left corner of the Roads screen (Figure 7-1 on page 7-2).
• On the Calculate Road Points screen, select the desired road
point types (Figure 7-4 on page 7-5). If needed, change the
station interval and tap Next to set the properties of the generated

7-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Horizontal Alignments

points in corresponding screens. In the last screen, opened by the

Next button, tap the Calc button to perform calculations.

Figure 7-4. Calculate Road Points

Editing Horizontal Alignments

To edit a horizontal alignment, tap Edit Roads Horizontal.
1. On the Hz Alnt screen (Figure 7-5), either double-tap the
horizontal alignment or highlight it and tap the Edit button.

Figure 7-5. Horizontal Alignment

P/N 7010-0945 7-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

2. On the Start Pt tab of the Edit Hz Alnt screen (Figure 7-6),

enter the alignment name and Start Point, the Code, the North/
East coordinates, and the Start Station number (or the starting
chain distance).

Figure 7-6. Edit Horizontal Alignment

The point name can be entered manually (if a new point name is
entered, the point will be created with the coordinates entered in
the North and East fields), selected from the map, or selected
from the list. If needed, enter a photo note for the point.
3. On the Hz tab of the Edit Hz Alnt screen (Figure 7-7), add
horizontal alignment elements.

Figure 7-7. Add Horizontal Alignment Elements

7-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Horizontal Alignments

• To add a horizontal alignment element (Figure 7-8), tap the Add

button and select an element from the floating menu: either line,
curve, spiral, or intersection point.
• In the corresponding screen displayed, enter parameters for the
element (length and azimuth for line, length, radius, azimuth, turn
for curve; length, radius, azimuth, turn, direction, for spiral; point
coordinates, curve radius, incoming and exiting spiral lengths, for
intersection point) and tap the ok button. Add as many
elements as needed to define the road.
• To view the start and end stations (or chainages) information for
the selected alignment element, highlight it and tap the End
Station information under the element list (see Figure 7-8 on
page 7-7).

Figure 7-8. Information on Element Start and End Stations

4. Tap the ok button on the Edit Hz Alnt screen to save the

horizontal alignment and return to the Hz Alnt screen.

Adding a Line
1. To add a line, select the Line option from the Insert or Add
floating menu on the Horizontal tab of the Edit Horizontal
Alignment screen. The Line Screen displays.

P/N 7010-0945 7-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

2. On the Line screen, enter the length of the line element and the
azimuth only for the starting element of the road (Figure 7-9 on
page 7-8). By default, the azimuth is set tangent to the previous
element. To change the azimuth of all other elements, remove
the check mark from the Tangent to Previous Item box on the
Help Icon in the upper-left corner of the screen.

Caution should be exercised when setting the

NOTICE azimuth, since road elements are usually tangential
to each other.

3. Tap the ok button to save the element to the road and to

return to the Edit Hz Alnt screen (Figure 7-8 on page 7-7).

Figure 7-9. Add Line

Adding a Curve
1. To add a curve, select the Curve option from the Insert or Add
floating menu on the Horizontal tab of the Edit Hz Alnt screen.
The Curve screen displays.
2. On the Curve screen (Figure 7-10 on page 7-9), enter the
following parameters, and tap the ok button to save the
element to the road and to return to the Edit Hz Alnt screen
(Figure 7-8 on page 7-7).

7-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Horizontal Alignments

• The length of the curve element, or one of five parameters

unambiguously defining the curve length: chord, tangent, middle
ordinate (the distance from the midpoint of a chord to the
midpoint of the corresponding curve), external (the distance from
the midpoint of the curve to the tangent), or delta (the angle
between the radii corresponding to the curve). Using the degree
of chord (DCH) or degree of curve (DCV) parameters, the radius
can be calculated.
• The azimuth only for the starting element of the road. By default,
the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element. To change the
azimuth of all other elements, remove the check mark from the
Tangent to Previous Item menu on the Help Icon in the upper-
left corner of the screen.

Caution should be exercised when setting the

NOTICE azimuth, since road elements are usually tangential
to each other.

• For the direction of turn (Figure 7-10), select either Right (for
clockwise direction) or Left (for counter-clockwise direction.)

Figure 7-10. Add Curve

P/N 7010-0945 7-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

Adding a Spiral
1. To add a spiral, select the Spiral option from the Insert or Add
floating menu on the Horizontal tab of the Edit Hoz Alnt
screen (Figure 7-8 on page 7-7). The Spiral screen displays.
2. On the Spiral screen (Figure 7-11 on page 7-11), enter the
following parameters:
• The radius of the curve, or one of two parameters unambiguously
defining the radius: the degree of chord, or the degree of curve
(for detail, see “Adding a Curve” on page 7-8).
• The Length of the spiral or Sp Const, the parameter that is the
square root of the product of the length and the radius of the
spiral, as defined above. Consequently, the spiral constant has the
units of length.
• The azimuth only for the starting element of the road.
By default, the azimuth is set tangent to the previous element. To
change the azimuth of all other elements, remove the check mark
from the Tangent to Previous Item menu on the Help Icon in the
upper-left corner of the screen.

Caution should be exercised when setting the

NOTICE azimuth, since road elements are usually tangential
to each other.

• For the direction of turn, select either the Right value (clockwise
direction or the Left value (counter-clockwise direction.)

7-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Horizontal Alignments

• For the direction of movement along the spiral, select either TS to

SC (entering the turn), or CS to ST (exiting the turn)1.

Figure 7-11. Add Spiral

3. Tap the ok button to save the element to the road and to

return to the Edit Horizontal Alignment screen.

Intersection Point
1. To add an intersection point, select the Intersection Point
option from the Insert or Add floating menu on the Horizontal
tab of the Edit Hz Alnt screen. The Intersect Pt screen displays.
2. On the Intersect Pt screen (Figure 7-12), enter the following
parameters:
• For the name of the intersection point, either enter the name
manually (with the coordinates specified in the North and East
fields and a height of zero), or select it from the map or the list.
• The local coordinates of the intersection point cannot be changed
for an existing point.

1. The traverse points on the turn have the following markers:

TS-traverse-spiral; SC-spiral-circle; CS-circle-spiral; and ST-spiral
traverse.

P/N 7010-0945 7-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

• For the radius of the curve, or one of two parameters

unambiguously defining the radius, either enter the degree of
chord, or the degree of curve (for detail, see “Adding a Curve”
on page 7-8).
• The length of the corresponding spiral elements, or the spirals
constants are defined (see “Adding a Spiral” on page 7-10).

Figure 7-12. Add Intersection Point

3. Tap the ok button to save the element to the road and to

return to the Edit Hz Alnt screen (Figure 7-8 on page 7-7).

Editing Vertical Alignments

To create a vertical alignment, tap Edit Roads Vertical. The Vert
Alnt screen displays (Figure 7-13).

7-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Vertical Alignments

1. Tap the Add button to add a new vertical alignment. The Add
Vt Alnt screen displays (Figure 7-14 on page 7-13).

Figure 7-13. Add Vertical Alignment

2. On the Add Vt Alnt screen (Figure 7-14 on page 7-13), enter

the name of a new vertical alignment.

Figure 7-14. Add Vertical Alignment

• Select the method of creating the vertical alignment (VAL Type):

– select Length & Grade to create the vertical alignment by
sections of graded lines. The vertical alignment will be
presented as a set of sections between the stations where the
heights are known (usually these are the extremes of the

P/N 7010-0945 7-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

vertical alignment line), and the interval around the station

where the vertical alignment line has a parabolic shape.
– select Station & Elevation to create the vertical alignment by
elements, starting and finishing at any station where you want
and starting again.
• Tapping the ok button opens the next Add Vt Alnt screens
similar to those for editing vertical alignments (Figure 7-15).
3. For the Length & Grade type, on the Start Pt tab of the Edit Vt
Alnt screen (Figure 7-15), enter the name of the vertical
alignment and parameters of the starting point and station. (For
the Station & Elevation vertical alignment type, the start point
name is not needed).

Figure 7-15. Add Vertical Alignment – Start Pt Tab

• The start point name can be entered either manually, selected

from the map, or selected from the list (the point will be created
with the height entered in the height field for a new point name).
If needed, enter a photo note for the point.
• The point code can be entered manually or selected from the
drop-down list. The code of an existing point cannot be edited.

7-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 15 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Vertical Alignments

4. On the Vert tab of the Add Vt Alnt (<name>) screen (Figure 7-

16), add the vertical alignment elements, or long sections (for
the Station & Elevation vertical alignment type).

Figure 7-16. Add Vertical Alignment – Vert Tab

• When the vertical alignment type is Length & Grade, tap the
Add button and select either vertical grade or parabola from the
floating menu. Enter the parameters of the element: either length
and grade for the vertical grade, or parameters for a selected
curve (either length, start and end grade for the parabola, or the
radius of the arc for the circular arc).
• When the vertical alignment type is Station & Elevation, tap the
Add button and enter the parameters of the Long Section: either
the length of the parabola at the station (with the assumption that
the station is located in the middle of the interval), or the radius of
the arc, depending on the type of the curve type selected.
Add as many elements or long sections as needed to define the
road.
• Tap End Station information under the list of elements or long
sections to view the start and end stations for the selected item
(Figure 7-17 on page 7-16).
5. Tap the ok button on the Add Vt Alnt screen (Figure 7-
17) to save the vertical alignment created and return to the Vt
Alnt screen. The new vertical alignment will be displayed in the
list.

P/N 7010-0945 7-15

SSF_UM_um.book Page 16 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

Figure 7-17. Information on Start and End Stations

To view the stations of the highest and low positions in the vertical
alignment, select the High/Low Positions option from the pop-up
menu opened by the Help Icon in the upper-left corner of the screen.

Figure 7-18. High/Low Positions

7-16 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 17 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Vertical Alignments

Adding Vertical Grade

1. To add a vertical grade, select the Vertical Grade option from
the Insert or Add floating menu on the Vert tab of the Edit Vt
Alnt screen (Figure 7-17 on page 7-16).
2. On the Vertical Grade screen (Figure 7-19), enter the length of
the vertical grade element and the grade percentage of the
element. If the grade is falling, the value should be set to
negative.
3. Tap the ok button to save the vertical alignment element
created and return to the Add Vertical Alignment screen.

Figure 7-19. Add Vertical Grade

Adding a Curve
1. To add a curve, select the Curve option from the Insert or Add
floating menu on the Vertical tab of the Edit Vt Alnt screen
(Figure 7-17 on page 7-16). The Curve screen displays.
2. On the Curve screen (Figure 7-20), select the type of curve to
add, either Circular Arc or Parabola. The plot at the bottom of
the screen shows the element appearance.

P/N 7010-0945 7-17

SSF_UM_um.book Page 18 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

Figure 7-20. Add Vertical Curve

3. Enter the radius of the arc or the length of the parabola element,
depending on the type of curve selected.
4. Enter the starting and ending grades percentage of the element.
If the grade is falling, use a negative value.

Adding Long Sections

1. For Long Sections vertical alignment types, only enter the
vertical alignment name in the Start Pt tab of the Add Vt Alnt
screen (Figure 7-14 on page 7-13).
2. To add a long section, tap the Insert or Add floating menu on
the Vertical tab of the Edit Vt Ant screen (Figure 7-15 on
page 7-14). The Long Section screen displays.
• On the Long Section screen (Figure 7-21 on page 7-19), select
the type of the curve to add from the Curve Type drop-down list,
either Parabola or Circular Arc, and enter the station distance
from the beginning of the road, the elevation (height) of the
station, and the length of the parabola at the station (with the
assumption that the station is located in the middle of the
interval), or the radius of the arc, depending on the type of curve
selected.

7-18 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 19 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing X-Sect Templates

Figure 7-21. Add Long Section

3. Tap the ok button to save the element to the road and to

return to the Add Vt Alnt screen (Figure 7-17 on page 7-16).

Editing X-Sect Templates

To work with Cross-Section Templates, tap Edit
Roads Templates. The X-Sect Templates screen displays
(Figure 7-22).

Figure 7-22. X-sect Templates

P/N 7010-0945 7-19

SSF_UM_um.book Page 20 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

1. To create a cross-section, tap the Add button on the X-Sect

Templates screen (Figure 7-22).
2. On the X-Sect Templates screen, enter the parameters of the
template: the name of the template, the Cut/Fill slope
parameters, and the segments comprising the template
(Figure 7-23).

Figure 7-23. X-sect Templates

3. To add a segment to the template, tap the Add button. The

Segment screen displays.

Figure 7-24. Segment

4. On the Segment screen (Figure 7-24) enter the parameters of

the segment (the name of ending segment point and offsets).

7-20 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 21 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing Cross-Section Sets

5. The added segment will be attached after the last segment in the
list. Repeat adding segments until the template is ready for
work.
6. Tap the ok button. The template will appear in the list of
templates.

Editing Cross-Section Sets

To create a set of cross-sections, tap Edit Roads X-Sections. The
X-Sect Set screen displays (Figure 7-25 on page 7-21).

Figure 7-25. Cross Section Set

1. To edit a selected cross section set, either double-tap the cross

section set or highlight it and tap the Edit button.
2. To remove a selected cross-section set from the list use the
Delete button.
3. Tap the Add button to add a new cross-section set. The Edit X-
Sect Set screen displays.
4. On the Edit X-Sect Set screen (Figure 7-26 on page 7-22), enter
the name of the new cross-section set and tap the Add button to
add cross-section to the set.

P/N 7010-0945 7-21

SSF_UM_um.book Page 22 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

Figure 7-26. Add Cross Section Set

5. In the X-Section screen, define the station, where the cross-

section will be applied, or the distance to this station, and
specify the cross-section templates for the left and/or the right
parts of the road cross-section. These can be chosen only from
the existing cross-section templates. Tap the ok button.

Figure 7-27. Cross Section

6. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add as many cross-sections as necessary

to define the road.
If two or more cross sections are defined in one set, the
intermediate cross sections are calculated using interpolation.

7-22 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 23 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing String Sets

Editing String Sets

String Set is a combination of strings that represents the three
dimensional surface of the road or a desired part of it. A single string
is defined by one or many pairs of the horizontal and vertical
alignments.
To create a set of strings, tap Edit Roads String Set. The String Set
screen displays (Figure 7-28) a list of string sets used for the road and
a general scaled view of the highlighted string set.

Figure 7-28. String Set

1. To edit a selected string set, either double-tap the string set or

highlight it and tap the Edit button.
2. To remove a selected string set from the list use the Delete
button.
3. Tap the Add button to add a new string set. The Edit String Set
screen displays a list of single strings included in the set.
4. On the Edit String Set screen (Figure 7-29 on page 7-24), enter
the name of the new string set and tap the Add button to add a
new road string to the set.
The Edit Road String screen displays.

P/N 7010-0945 7-23

SSF_UM_um.book Page 24 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

Figure 7-29. Edit String Set

5. The Edit Road String screen displays the string name and a list
of alignment pairs in the string, and scaled plots of a
highlighted pair of the horizontal and vertical alignments.

Figure 7-30. Edit Road String

6. Tap Edit to edit the selected pair of alignments or Add to

create a new pair of alignments. The Edit Alignment screen
displays (Figure 7-31 on page 7-25).

7-24 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 25 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Editing String Sets

Figure 7-31. Edit String Alignments

7. On the Edit Alignment screen, you can select:

• Horizontal/ vertical alignments from the drop-down lists of
existing ones, or
• Linework from the linework list or from the map from which to
create alignments. In this case, you wall be prompted to name the
created alignments for string (Figure 7-32).

Figure 7-32. Enter Alignment Name

• Tap the ok button to return to the Edit Road String screen

with the created alignments.

P/N 7010-0945 7-25

SSF_UM_um.book Page 26 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Designing Roads

Editing Roads from the Main

Map
Editing roads in the job can be accessed either from the Edit Roads
menu or from the Main Map.
To open the Main Map, tap the Map icon.
1. When in the Main Map, tap the desired road to highlight it.
Then hold the stylus on the selected road for a while until a
pop-up menu displays (Figure 7-33).

Map Icon

Figure 7-33. Editing from the Main Map

2. To select multiple objects, tap the toolbar button and

extend a square window from right to left to include the desired
objects. These objects can be deleted or added to a Layer.

7-26 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 8

Surveying with
Spectrum Survey Field
Performing GPS+ Surveys
After creating a job with the desired configuration in SSF and
completing the preliminary work (the antenna is plumbed and the
receiver and controller are connected), the survey can begin.
• To use RTK measurements, two receivers are needed: a Base
Station receiver, with an antenna plumbed above a point with
known coordinates, and a Rover receiver, with an antenna
plumbed above the points being surveyed.

If a local system is used, perform Localization first

NOTICE to determine coordinate transformation parameters
from Geodetic/Grid coordinates to local
coordinates.

Survey work can be performed in two modes: Topo

and Auto Topo. Topo surveys collect data one at a
T
time at several locations, whereas Auto Topo
TIP

surveys continuously collect data (usually for

trajectory survey work).

• To use Network RTK and Network DGPS positioning, a Rover

receiver is needed, with an antenna plumbed above the points
being surveyed, and correction data received by the Rover from
reference station networks.
• To use the Real Time DGPS survey mode, a Rover receiver is
needed, with an antenna plumbed above the points being

P/N 7010-0945 8-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

surveyed, and correction data received by the Rover from

differential services.
• To use the PP modes, two receivers are needed: one located on an
occupation with known coordinates, and the other is either
located on static occupations (PP Static mode), moves along a
trajectory (PP Kinematic mode), or moves to position points of
interest (PP enabled RTK, Network RTK, Network DGPS and PP
DGPS). Data collected in PP (post-processing) modes can be
processed later in the office for estimation of baseline vectors.
The Topo and Auto Topo surveys for PP Kinematic and PP
DGPS modes are performed similarly to real-time surveys.
Job configuration settings will be applied to the Base receiver only
after starting the Base and to the Rover receiver only after selecting a
survey option.

Localization
Localization parameters can be defined either before beginning the
job or after the completing the job.
Localization parameters provide transforming coordinates between an
original coordinate system (WGS84, or any datum selected, or any
grid selected) and a local system. To calculate these parameters, the
localization (control) points with pairs of coordinates in both systems
are used. The local coordinates and the original coordinates are those
of the same point on the surface of the earth, in the local and original
systems, respectively. The names of the local (Known) and original
(Measured) points must be different.
Under Local (known) coordinates SSF understands coordinates of
Ground type. Therefore, always enter or import local coordinates as
ground.
For localization to work properly (for WGS84, or any datum
selected), import local coordinates with Projection set to <none> and
Ground Coord Type in the Coord System screen.
For localization with a current grid projection, check the Grid/Ground
box on the Coord System screen to enable Ground Coord Type.

8-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

The quality of coordinates and general layout of localization points

directly affects localization accuracy. Localization points should be
located more or less evenly around the jobsite.
1. Tap Setup GPS Localization. The Localization screen
displays the list of pair points which will be initially empty
(Figure 8-1 on page 8-3).
2. On the Localization screen, select the desired type of
localization that SSF allows for the given original coordinates
(Figure 8-1).

Figure 8-1. Localization Screen

• select WGS84 -> Local to transform WGS84 coordinates to local

coordinates. In this case SSF will use the oblique stereographic
map projection on WGS84 as intermediate to calculate
localization parameters.
• select Datum -> Local to transform coordinates on any datum
(selected in the Coordinate System dialog of the current job) to
local coordinates. In this case SSF will use the oblique
stereographic map projection on the datum as intermediate to
calculate localization parameters.
• select Grid -> Local to transform coordinates on any projection
(selected in the Coordinate System dialog of the current job) to
local coordinates. In this case SSF will use this projection on
corresponding datum to calculate localization parameters.

P/N 7010-0945 8-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

This type of localization is more rigorous than others

NOTICE which use only the stereographic projection for an
unknown local projection. This way allows
increasing the distance between localization points
without disadvantage of transformation precision.

• Check marked Keep scale 1.000 preserves localization from a

scale transformation.
3. Tap Add to add pairs of points to the list. On the Add Point
screen, set the following parameters, then tap the ok
button (Figure 8-2):

Figure 8-2. Add Localization Points

• In the Known Point panel, enter a point with the local coordinates
in the Point field. Check mark the Use Horizontal and Use
Vertical boxes to use this point for horizontal and/or vertical
localization. The horizontal and vertical use of any control point
can be changed by highlighting the desired line in the
Localization screen (Figure 8-1 on page 8-3), and then tapping on
the header of the H Control or V Control. This toggles the display
between “yes” and “no”. Double-tapping on the selecting line
opens the Add Point screen (Figure 8-2) that also allows
changing the horizontal and vertical use.

8-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

• In the Measured Point panel, specify a point with original

coordinates in the Point field. Tap the start measuring button
to use the current position or manually add the point to the job
points.
4. Repeat step 3 to enter additional localization points. Note the
following information about localization points.
• When only one localization point is available, the offsets are
computed and the system is oriented to North, and the scale is set
at height.
• When two localization points are available, the offsets, azimuth,
and scale are computed.
• With three localization points, Vertical deflection is also
computed.
• When additional localization points are specified, the parameters
resulting in the least errors will be computed.
• The value of the residuals specify the level of reliability for each
localization point. The residuals are along horizontal or vertical
axes. The control columns display the status of the point, either
“yes” for used or “no” for not used. Select the line and tap H
Control or V Control to change the status.
• The localization is updated (recomputed) every time a new point
is added to the list of localization points. The new coordinate
system will be saved under the name “Localization” and is
automatically selected.
5. To view the results of the localization, tap the Details button on
the Localization screen (Figure 8-1 on page 8-3).
6. The Localization details screen displays (see Figure 8-3 on
page 8-6). The Map tab displays the localization points marked
by blue triangles.

P/N 7010-0945 8-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Figure 8-3. Localization Details

7. To configure the modem, select the Config Radio option from

the Help Icon menu in the upper-left corner of the screen.
8. To edit the job points, select the Edit Points option from the
bitmap menu in the upper-left corner of the screen.
9. To export the localization data to available data formats, select
the Export To File option from the bitmap menu in the upper
left corner of the screen.
The name of localization in the GC3 format will be set to the
current job name. After importing such a file into a new job, the
coordinate system will be saved under the name of the job
where the GC3 file was created.

Export File formats allow only WGS84 -> Local

NOTICE type of localization.

8-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

Starting the Base

1. Connect the controller to the Base Receiver. Switch on the
devices.
2. Select the Setup GPS Start Base icons. On the Start Base
screen, set the following information (Figure 8-4 on page 8-7):

Figure 8-4. Start Base

• Enter the coordinates of base location manually, select a point

with the known coordinates, using the map or list of available
points.
• Enter the code of the Base manually or select the code from the
list.
• The current location can also be measured by tapping the auto
position icon (the coordinates of the current point will
appear), and can be used to set the Base.
• Measure and insert the Antenna height in the corresponding field.
If the antenna has not been set up yet for the job, specify the
antenna parameters.

P/N 7010-0945 8-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

3. Tap the button to set the receiver as a Base,

transmitting data.

For external Digital UHF and Satel UHF radios,

NOTICE performs quick start of the base. Pressing this
button queries a frequency list from the radio and
shows it in the status bar in the bottom of the
screen. After getting the frequency list, select an
appropriate frequency from the drop-down menu,
and tap the near OK to setup the radio.

4. To set/change the radio parameters selected in the job

configuration, tap on the Config Radio menu item in the upper-
left corner of the screen (see “Config Radio” on page 8-9).
5. To start multiple bases, tap on the Multi Base menu item in the
upper left corner of the screen (“Multi Base” on page 8-11).
6. To get faster access to the Grid to Ground system (in the
defined system) for the Origin Point option, select the Grid to
Ground option from the Help Icon menu in the upper-left
corner of the screen available if starting the base in a grid
coordinate system.

Starting Base with Autonomous Position

1. If the Base starts in autonomous mode, and an observed Topo
point has known coordinates stored in the job and has the same
name as the base, you can correct the base position.

8-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

2. In the Duplicate Points screen, check and enable the Correct

Base box (Figure 8-5).

Figure 8-5. Correct Base

The existing coordinates of the observed point are not replaced by the
coordinates of the observed point. Instead, the known coordinates of
this point are used to correct the Base coordinates. For Correct Base
to work properly, the coordinate type selected in Display (see
“Display” on page 4-78) must be the same as for the known
coordinates of the observed Topo point.
After either closing the Topo screen or moving to another tab,
recomputations are performed and the coordinates of all points are
updated using the new Base coordinates.

Config Radio
Use the Config Radio menu item in the upper left corner of the Start
Base screen to set up the radio modem (The same item is accessible
from the Status, Topo, and Auto Topo screens.) Also, if necessary,
you can change the radio parameters selected in the job configuration,
and then set them to the radio modem.

P/N 7010-0945 8-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Figure 8-6 shows an example for Internal GR-3 Digital UHF radio
modem.

Figure 8-6. Config GR-3 Digital UHF Radio

1. Tap the Get Freq(uency) button to set the frequency that the
radio will broadcast and / or listen to.

A Script file with Frequency list (Pac Crest

NOTICE Channels.ccx) must be loaded (using the Modem
TPS software) before any frequencies will display
in SSF. Please do this BEFORE configuring the
radio.

2. For the base radio, set the signal strength that the Base will
transmit.
3. Tap the Set Radio button to set the parameters to the radio.

8-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

Configure RE-S1 Repeater

To setup the RE-S1 as a stand-alone repeater during the survey
configuration, first enable the usage of the RE-S1 radio modem as a
repeater. Then the Config RE-S1 Repeater option appears in the pop-
up menu of the Status, Start Base and Topo screens. This option
opens the Config Radio screen to set the RE-S1 as a repeater.

Figure 8-7. RE-S1 Repeater Configuration

1. Select the radio port that connects with the receiver or

controller, the territory (North America, Australia or New
Zealand) where the RE-S1 is used, and the operating frequency
channel.
2. Tap the Connect button to open a daisy chain and send
commands to setup the RE-S1 radio as a repeater.
3. Tap the Disconnect button to turn the RE-S1 modem off.

Multi Base
The Multi Base function in SSF is implemented using the Time
Division Multiple Access (TDMA) mode of transmission. This means
that one Base can transmit at the beginning of the second and another
Base can transmit a half second later on the same frequency. The
Rover can recognize the two separate data streams.
1. Create a job, configure the RTK survey and set all necessary
settings.

P/N 7010-0945 8-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

2. To set up Base 1, connect the controller to the receiver at Base,

then tap Survey Start Base.
• Select Multi Base from the menu in the upper-left corner of the
Start Base screen. The Multi Base screen displays (Figure 8-8).

Figure 8-8. Multi Base

Select the Base Station ID and Transmit Delay. For example,

select 11 as the Base Station ID and select 30 msec for the
Transmit Delay (Figure 8-8). With transmission delays, the bases
are allowed to broadcast multiple RTK data on the same
frequency.
• Tap the button. Base 1 will transmit as ID 11 at 30
milliseconds after the second. It will output RTK data at a
transmission rate of 1 second. Disconnect from Base 1.
3. Setup Base 2: connect the controller to the receiver at Base 2.
• Setup of Base 2 is the same process as for Base 1 but a different
ID and transmission time must be selected for Base 2, for
example 12. Recommended time delay for Base 2 is 530 msec.

• Tap the button. Base 2 will transmit as ID 12 at 530

milliseconds after the second or 1/2 second after Base 1. Base 2
will also output RTK data at transmission rate of 1 second.
Disconnect from Base 2.

8-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

4. Note that both transmitters need to be set to transmit at the

same frequency and they must transmit in a CMR+ format.
5. At the Rover, connect the controller to the Rover receiver. If
the rover receives CMR+ corrections from more than one base,
there will be an additional tab in the Survey/Status menu
called Mult-Base, which is a table with information about the
Base Stations the Rover receiver is listening to (Figure 8-9).

Figure 8-9. Multi Base tab

• Check which base to use. Currently, SSF only supports

processing RTK baselines from one base at a time.
• After the Topo screen is opened, the receiver connected to the
controller will be configured as the Rover.
6. For a newly created job, the bases remain active for another
job. It is not necessary to reconnect to the bases and restart
them. On the Rover side only, open the Status screen and select
the base with which to work.

P/N 7010-0945 8-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Status of GPS+ Survey

The status information gives the user an overview of the receiver
main operating states. The states are indicated only for information.
Select the Setup GPS Status icons to open the Status screen that
shows the states of the current position of the receiver, RTK, and
satellite constellations (see Figure 8-10 on page 8-14).
For details on status information, refer to the SSF Reference
Manual, chapter 8.

Figure 8-10. Status

Setting Up Survey With Known Points

The “Known Point Initialization”method of initialization is
performed when the rover occupies a known point as a faster step in a
kinematic survey to initialize the fixed solutions.
This function is used with single frequency receivers and for quality
control on dual frequency receivers. Tap the Setup GPS Known
Point Init icons to initialize the receiver using known coordinates for
the Rover station.
1. In the Known Point Init screen (Figure 8-11 on page 8-15),
select the known point and set the antenna parameters of the
station.

8-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 15 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

Figure 8-11. Known Point Rover

2. To start initialization, tap the Initialize button (Figure 8-11 on

page 8-15). The KPI Position screen displays the status
information on Rover initialization (Figure 8-12).

Figure 8-12. KPI Position Screen

P/N 7010-0945 8-15

SSF_UM_um.book Page 16 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Initializing mmGPS+
Before beginning the setup for a mmGPS+ system, configure the
mmGPS+ aided survey (see “Creating a GPS+ Configuration” on
page 4-3).
The setup process of a mmGPS+ system includes calibration of the
laser transmitter and initialization of the sensor.

Transmitter Calibration
The laser transmitter is the vertical grade control reference for the
jobsite. The following procedure will calibrate the transmitter with
the correct channel and communication port, as well as set up the
transmitter’s height and locate it at the jobsite.
1. Connect the controller and transmitter.
2. Tap Setup GPS mmGPS+Init. The Init mmGPS+ screen
displays (Figure 8-13 on page 8-16).
3. On the (Trans) Data tab, select the ID that corresponds to the
channel of the transmitter, then tap Add (Figure 8-13). The
Transmitter screen displays.

Figure 8-13. Initialize mmGPS – (Trans) Data Tab

4. On the Transmitter screen (Figure 8-14), enter a Name for the

transmitter (usually the serial number), select the Com Port for
the transmitter (usually COM1), then tap the Get Data button
(Figure 8-14).

8-16 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 17 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

Figure 8-14. Enter and Get Transmitter Data

5. Once SSF retrieves the transmitter’s data, close the setup

successful screen. Then tap the ok button.
6. On the (Trans) Pos tab, select the desired transmitter. Tap Edit
to enter the transmitter’s position (Figure 8-15).

Figure 8-15. init mmGPS -Trans Tab

7. On the Init mmGPS+ screen, enter the following information

and tap the ok button (Figure 8-16 on page 8-18):
• Using the map, select the point the transmitter is installed over.
• Enter the height of the transmitter using one of the following:

P/N 7010-0945 8-17

SSF_UM_um.book Page 18 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

– Enter the Ht measurement from the ground to the mark on the

transmitter’s side and the m method as slant.
– Check and enable the 2m Fixed Tripod box if using a 2 meter
fixed tripod.

Figure 8-16. Enter Transmitter’s Position

8. Unplug the controller from the transmitter. Continue with the

following section to initialize the sensor.

Sensor Initialization
The initialization process will upload transmitter calibration
information to the sensor connected with the receiver, as well as set
up the sensor for receiving the transmitter’s laser beam.
1. Connect the controller and GPS receiver.
2. Select the Sensor tab and enter the following information
(Figure 8-17 on page 8-19):
• Select the Receiver Port that connects the receiver and sensor,
usually port D.
• Select the Transmitter ID, usually ANY. The ANY selection will
allow the sensor to independently select the transmitter with the
smallest error rate.
• Select Auto for the Sensor Gain to automatically control the
mmGPS receiver’s detection level of the transmitter’s signal.

8-18 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 19 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

• Check and enable the Init Time Improvement box to improve the
RTK fix time for the receiver.

Figure 8-17. Init mmGPS – Sensor Tab

3. Tap the Init Sensor button to start the initialization process.

4. When the initialization completes, tap Close on the setup
successful confirmation screen.
In the event that a point has been lost, the resection operation can
measure an unknown point. The self-levelling mechanism may also
need to be measured and the transmitter calibrated to ensure correct
grade. For details on these mmGPS operations, see Appendix A.

When using mmGPS+, include the height of the

NOTICE PZS-1 sensor with a 5/8 inch plug into the rover
antenna height.

P/N 7010-0945 8-19

SSF_UM_um.book Page 20 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Performing a Topo Survey

1. Tap Survey Topo. On the Topo screen (Figure 8-18):
• Enter the current Point name, enter a photo note using the button
if necessary,
• Select a Code. A code symbol will show the code entity type (
Point, Line, or Area). Code needs to be defined at the
time it is entered if it is not a code that exists in the codes dialog.
The Topo screen will auto-hide and show the string input box
based on the code type. All line and area codes will display the
string field while all point codes will hide the string field.
• Open the Point Attributes screen under the icon to set the
code and attributes for the selected code, layer and to enter a
photo note for the point if necessary. For GMS-2, GMS-2 Pro or
GRS-1 you may capture a picture using a camera integrated into
these devices.
• Enter the Ant Ht and select a height type.

Figure 8-18. Topo

2. To set the mmGPS+ options in mmGPS+ aided RTK survey,

select the mmGPS+ Options item from the Help Icon menu in
the upper-left corner of the Status, and Topo screens.

8-20 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 21 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

3. Use the Config Radio menu item in the upper left corner of the
screen to set and/or change the parameters to the radio modem.
(For details, refer to “Config Radio” on page 8-9.)
4. When in DGPS survey mode using OmniSTAR differential
corrections, select the Config OmniSTAR item from the bitmap
menu in the upper-left corner of the screen to start the
OmniSTAR service (“OmniSTAR Status” on page 8-24).
5. When in DGPS survey mode using Beacon differential
corrections, select the Config Beacon item from the bitmap
menu in the upper-left corner of the screen to start the Beacon
service (“Beacon Status” on page 8-25). If using the differential
corrections receiver BR-1, select the Config BR-1 item from
the bitmap menu in the upper-left corner to configure the
Beacon receiver (“Config BR-1” on page 8-26).
6. Tap the button to change the survey parameters settings to
desired values.
7. If the location of the point to be observed is unreachable, set
offset parameters using a simple offset or offsets from a line.
Tap the Offsets tab (Figure 8-19 on page 8-22).
• For simple offset use, tap the button, enter the
name and Code of the offset point, and insert the angle parameter
(Azimuth or Bearing), the height parameter (zenith distance,
elevation angle or vertical distance) and the horizontal distance.
Toggling between angle or height parameters is performed by
tapping the corresponding button. Tap to save the offset
point.
• For line offset use, tap the button, enter or select
from the list or map (or measure positions by means of the
button) two points comprising the reference line, specify the
direction of the line and enter the parameters of the offset point:
Name, Code, the distance along the line of sight between the end
point and the projection of the offset point on the reference line,
the distance from the reference line to the offset point along the
projection, and the height of the point.

P/N 7010-0945 8-21

SSF_UM_um.book Page 22 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Tap to save the point; several offset points can be saved

using one line.

• For laser offset use, tap the button, which is

available when an external laser distance meter has been added in
the Config Survey or when using SSF on GMS-2 Pro with an
integrated laser.

Figure 8-19. Topo – Offsets

8. Tap on the Topo tab to start the measurement process

(Figure 8-18 on page 8-20). After pressing this button, a new
cancel button appears along with the counter of the epochs
collected. When using a mmGPS system, the status bar displays
a mmGPS icon . This icon displays when the receiver
calculates mmGPS heights.
9. In the survey for post processing, begin logging files to the
receiver: tap the button (see Figure 8-20 on page 8-23).
To stop logging, tap the same button (during the logging
process, this button says “stop log” , and the symbol

8-22 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 23 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

located in the icon bar on the place of Status icon in the RTK
mode becomes: ).

Figure 8-20. Topo for PP Survey

10. View the Data tab for details on the last point stored.
11. Use the Map tab to view a plot of the point with respect to other
stored objects. If necessary, select the Grid Setup option from
the pop-up menu on the top left corner of the screen to setup a
grid to be displayed with the Map.
12. If a topo point is observed a second time and named with the
identical name, a prompt will ask to Override, Rename, or Store
as Weighted Average point. Multiple WA points can be stored
and the results can be viewed in the Edit Points screen. The
Use in WA button makes weighted averages of topo points.

P/N 7010-0945 8-23

SSF_UM_um.book Page 24 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

OmniSTAR Status
To view the status of the OmniSTAR service for DGPS survey type,
select the Config OmniSTAR item from the Help Icon menu in the
upper-left corner of the Topo screen. The same item is accessible
from the Status and Auto Topo screens.
1. Select the OmniSTAR satellite from which to receive
differential correction data (Figure 8-21).

Figure 8-21. Config OmniSTAR

2. Tap Status to view the status of the link to the OmniSTAR

satellite selected (Figure 8-22 on page 8-24).

Figure 8-22. OmniSTAR HP Status

8-24 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 25 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

Beacon Status
To view the status of the Beacon service for DGPS survey type, select
the Config Beacon item from the Help Icon menu in the upper-left
corner of the Topo screen. The same item is accessible from the
Status and Auto Topo screens. The Beacon screen displays
(Figure 8-23).
1. Select the country where the radio-beacon differential service is
located and the station that broadcasts differential corrections
for the Rover receiver.

Figure 8-23. Configure Beacon Status

2. Tap Status to view the status of the link to the radio-beacon.

On the Beacon Status screen, the following information is
shown, if applicable: the name of station, the Beacon board

P/N 7010-0945 8-25

SSF_UM_um.book Page 26 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

version, the broadcasting frequency, and signal-to-noise ratio

(Figure 8-24).

Figure 8-24. Beacon Status

Config BR-1
When using the Beacon receiver BR-1 in DGPS survey configuration,
select the Config BR-1 item from the Help Icon menu in the upper
left corner of the Topo screen to configure the BR-1. The same item is
accessible from the Status and Auto Topo screens.
1. Tap the Config button to send the appropriate configuration
command for BR-1 radio channels (Figure 8-25 on page 8-27):
• When Automatic Scan mode is on, all four channels of the
BR-1 will automatically scan frequencies until one of the
channels find the available Beacon Signal. After the signal is
found, the channel will keep this frequency.
• When Automatic Scan mode is off, the frequency and data
transfer rate of the known Station selected will only be set to
channel ‘a’ of the BR-1 receiver. The other channels will not
work.

8-26 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 27 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

Figure 8-25. BR-1 Configuration

mmGPS+ Options
To set the mmGPS+ options in mmGPS+ aided RTK survey, select
the mmGPS+ Options item from the Help Icon menu in the upper-left
corner of the Status, and Topo screens.
On the mmGPS+ Opts screen, do the following (Figure 8-26 on
page 8-28):
• mmGPS+ is DISABLED – select “Turn mmGPS+ ON” from the
drop-down list to enable mmGPS+ height computation.
• Use weighted and height computations – check and enable to
combine mmGPS elevations and GPS elevations. When selected,
this option forces the receiver/sensor to always consider the angle
and distance when determining the elevation, then combines the
two elevations accordingly. This option works well at large
distances (300m) and steep angles.

P/N 7010-0945 8-27

SSF_UM_um.book Page 28 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

• Height Difference Limit – Set the threshold for the difference

between GPS and mmGPS+ height measurements.

Figure 8-26. mmGPS+ Options

Performing an Auto Topo Survey

1. Tap Survey Auto Topo. On the Auto Topo screen, enter the
point name, select the Code if necessary and insert the Antenna
height and height type (Figure 8-27).

Figure 8-27. Auto Topo

8-28 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 29 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

2. Use the Config Radio menu item in the upper-left corner of the
screen to set and/or change the parameters to the radio modem.
(For details, refer to “Config Radio” on page 8-9.)
3. When in DGPS survey mode using OmniSTAR differential
corrections, select the Config OmniSTAR item from the bitmap
menu in the upper-left corner of the screen to start the
OmniSTAR service (“OmniSTAR Status” on page 8-24).
4. When in DGPS survey mode using Beacon differential
corrections, select the Config Beacon item from the bitmap
menu in the upper-left corner of the screen to start the Beacon
service (“Beacon Status” on page 8-25). If using the differential
corrections receiver BR-1, select the Config BR-1 item from
the bitmap menu in the upper left corner to configure the
Beacon receiver (“Config BR-1” on page 8-26).
5. Tap the button, select the parameters for data logging, and
tap the ok button: the solution type solution for automatic
data logging while moving and the interval between
measurements (meters or seconds). To return to default values,
tap Defaults.
6. Tap on the Auto Topo tab and begin moving. When using a
mmGPS system, the Auto Topo tab displays a mmGPS icon
. This icon displays when the receiver calculates mmGPS
heights.
7. To interrupt the process of survey, tap the button.
8. To override the interval Survey parameter temporarily and log
the current location, tap button.
9. In PP Kinematic and PP DGPS surveys, begin logging files to
the receiver: tap the button. To stop logging, tap the same
button (during logging, the button changes to “Stop Log” ,
and the symbol located in the icon bar changes to ).
10. Open the Data tab to view details of the last point stored.
11. Open the Map tab to see a plot of the point with respect to other
stored objects.

P/N 7010-0945 8-29

SSF_UM_um.book Page 30 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

12. If necessary, set up a grid displayed with the map using the
Grid Setup option from the Help Icon menu in the upper left
corner of the screen.
13. If the receiver switches base stations when recording real time
data, a warning message displays.

Cross-Section
A cross-section survey is performed to obtain the coordinates of
points that lie on a plane perpendicular to a center line. It is typically
performed by moving from one side of the road to the other in the
cross-sectional plane, and then crossing back in the opposite direction
at a different location along the road. This process is repeated at
different stations along the centerline, until all the desired cross-
sectional points have been observed.
1. To start working, tap Survey X-Section.
2. On the Cross Section screen, set the parameters of the station
where the cross-section survey is to be performed: the Road/
Horizontal alignment/Horizontal and Vertical alignments
name, the code and attributes of the center line, the station
where the cross section is surveyed and the increment of
distance towards the next station (Figure 8-28). Tap .

The Station and Interval fields appear only if the

NOTICE
road is selected.

8-30 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 31 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

Figure 8-28. Cross Section

3. On the X-Sect screen (Figure 8-29 on page 8-32) perform the

usual observation work relative to the cross-section, as
described in “Performing a Topo Survey” on page 8-20.
Cross-sectional points at the same station should have different
codes, with at least one of them having the centerline code. For
example, codes for cross-sectional points could be A, B, C, cl, D,
E, F, in the order of survey.
Tap the button to automatically change the station number.
Also, the application automatically uses the same codes but in the
opposite order for the next station (F, E, D, cl, C, B, A). The
station and the codes can be changed.

P/N 7010-0945 8-31

SSF_UM_um.book Page 32 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Figure 8-29. Cross-Section Accept

Find Station/Chainage
The Find Station task is used for the identification of the station by
computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the
projection of the station to the road, and the offset of the station from
the center line of the road.
1. To start working, select the Survey Find Station icons
(Figure 8-30 on page 8-33).
2. Enter the Road/Horizontal alignment/Horizontal and Vertical
alignments name, the name, and the code of the point and the
antenna height and type (Figure 8-30 on page 8-33).
3. To compute the result with an existing point, tap the button
(Figure 8-30 on page 8-33).
4. To compute the result with the coordinates of the current
location without making an observation, tap the button
(Figure 8-30).
5. To make an observation of the current location and store the
coordinates to a point, and to compute the result with this point,
tap the button (Figure 8-30).

8-32 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 33 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

Figure 8-30. Find Station.

Tape Dimension
Using the Tape Dimension task, calculate the periphery of structures,
such as buildings that have features perpendicular to each other. This
is done using tape measurements, relative to the two known points
that belong to one side of the structure (wall of the building), forming
the so called reference line.
1. To start working, tap Survey Tape Dimension (Figure 8-31
on page 8-34).
2. On the Ref Line tab, enter the information about the two points
that comprise the reference line: the names and codes. If the
reference line points are to be observed, tap the Meas button in
the corresponding fields (Figure 8-31 on page 8-34).

P/N 7010-0945 8-33

SSF_UM_um.book Page 34 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Figure 8-31. Tape Dimension – Ref Line Tab

3. On the Tape Dim tab, set the parameters for performing the
survey: the name and code of the surveyed point, and the
direction (left or right of the previous line) and the distance of
the movement from the previous point (Figure 8-32).

Figure 8-32. Tape Dimension – Tape Dim Tab

4. To apply the taped distance to the perimeter line, tap the

Accept button.
5. Close the Tape Dimension work in either of two ways:

8-34 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 35 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing GPS+ Surveys

• To connect the first and the last point with a line, tap Finish
and select the Close Polygon item from the drop-down menu
(Figure 8-32 on page 8-34).
• To calculate the difference between the last and the first
point, tap Finish, then select the Calc Closure item from the
menu (Figure 8-32 on page 8-34).

Performing a Static Survey

1. To open the Static Occupation screen (Figure 8-33), choose the
PP Static configuration in the Survey Config screen (use the
Configure icon) and tap Setup GPS Static Occupation
(Figure 8-33).

Figure 8-33. Static Occupation Screen

2. Enter the parameters of the occupation point: name, code and

antenna height and height type.
3. Tap Start Occ. The survey will start, and the Duration field
displays the time passed, since the beginning of survey.
4. To stop the survey, tap the Stop Occ button.

P/N 7010-0945 8-35

SSF_UM_um.book Page 36 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Performing Total Station

Surveys
After completing preliminary work (that is, the instrument is plumbed
above the reference point and the controller is connected to a modem
(for Robotic Surveys) or to the total station), the survey can begin.
First, set one or more backsight points to be used for the survey. Then
choose a task to perform: sideshot (single or multiple) survey, cross-
section survey, finding station, tape dimension measurement, or
missing line determination. In the case of Robotic Survey, the auto
topo task is also available. The remote control function should be set
before performing a Robotic survey.

Backsight Survey
1. Tap Setup Backsight (Figure 8-34 on page 8-37). The BS
Survey screen displays.
2. On the Setup tab of the BS Survey screen, set the following
backsight parameters (Figure 8-34 on page 8-37):
• Choose the occupation point using one of these methods:
– enter the name manually
– select the point from the map
– select the point from the list of fixed or job points
– add an arbitrary occupation point near a road station, or
– calculate the occupation point coordinates using the
coordinates of known points with the resection method. The
elevation can be computed using the known elevations of the
other points.
• Set the height of the instrument (HI) and the height of the
reflector (HR), choose the backsight point/backsight azimuth (or
enter multiple backsight points using the floating menu on the
bitmap in the corresponding field) and check if the height of the
backsight point rod is fixed for the whole set of measurements in
Ang/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev mode (Figure 8-34).

8-36 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 37 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Figure 8-34. Backsight Survey Setup

3. On the Measurement tab of the BS Survey screen:

• Set the horizontal circle reading that corresponds to the backsight
point direction to zero, azimuth, input value, the value obtained
from the instrument, or the value changed by +/- 90 or 180
degrees. Select the corresponding option from the menu .

Figure 8-35. Measurement

• Select (check mark boxes) if the robotic total station will turn to
the Backsight point, and if the distance to backsight point should
be measured.

P/N 7010-0945 8-37

SSF_UM_um.book Page 38 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

• To check the quality of the chosen backsight point, tap the Check
button. The screen displays the residuals of the current backsight
point (Figure 8-36).

Figure 8-36. Check Backsight

4. To set the backsight settings in the instrument, tap the Set

button.
5. Note that when moving to the next occupation, the previous
occupation point becomes a backsight point by default.

Sideshot (Topo) Survey

Once the backsight point is set, make a single sideshot.
1. Tap Survey Topo (Figure 8-37). Select the Sideshot Dir
measurement method using the settings button, and set the
order and the type of the measurements in a set.
2. On the Sideshot Dir screen, enter the point name, code, and the
height of the target.
3. Set the backsight point, if that has not been done before. Tap
the BS Setup button and follow the instructions in “Backsight
Survey” on page 8-36.
4. Check and enable the Traverse Point box to tag the point as
Traverse. The Traverse Points for the Measurement are stored
in the Traverse Point List.

8-38 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 39 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Figure 8-37. Sideshot-Direct

5. To select next occupation point, select the Adv entry from the
menu on the bitmap in the upper-left corner. Once the next
occupation point is selected from the traverse point list, the
controller automatically sets the current occupation point as the
backsight and the selected traverse point as the next occupation
point. If only one point is tagged as a traverse point, then this
point is automatically chosen as the next occupation point and
the current point is selected as the backsight (when the Adv
(advance) menu is selected).
6. To perform the sideshot, tap the button (Figure 8-37 on
page 8-39).
7. If a point location is unreachable, set offset parameters using
the Offsets tab. For details on these settings, refer to the SSF
Reference Manual.
• Hz Angle – defines a point using the horizontal angle from one
point and the distance to another.
• Hz-Vt Angle – defines a point using the horizontal and vertical
angles.
• Dist. Offset – defines a point giving from which to add or subtract
distances horizontally and vertically.

P/N 7010-0945 8-39

SSF_UM_um.book Page 40 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

• Hidden Point – defines a point on the ground surface, with a

slanted rod touching the ground point. The rod has two targets.
• 2 Line ISection – determines a point by the intersection of the
two lines. Each line is defined by two points or two
measurements.
• Line & Corner – determines a point on the corner using one line
defined by two points.
• Line & Offset – determines a point distant from a line defined by
two points.
• Plane & Corner – determines a point (Corner) by a plane defined
by three points and an angle measurement.
8. If the IS Robot (Live Video) instrument with WiFi connection
to the controller is used for surveying, the live video of the
instrument view appears on the dialogs.

WiFi and Ad-hoc network connection can be

TIP T established between IS Robot and FC-2200, FC-
2500, FC-200 or GRS-1.

The Video tab allows the user to touch the screen and have the
instrument drive to that location.

Figure 8-38. Live Video

8-40 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 41 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Measuring Sideshot Sets

If the measurement method is Sideshot-Direct/Reverse (performed
using the (SS-Dir/Rev) Sideshot-Direct/Reverse screen,
(Figure 8-39), a set of sideshots can be measured once the backsight
has been setup.
The measurement to a single point is taken using the Direct Position
and the Reverse Position of the Total Station (that is, Plunge (flip).
Rotate the Total station by 180 degrees to get the reverse
measurement.
For instance, if the Total Station Measurements in Direct Position are
HA =70, VA =60, SD =143.23m, then the reverse measurements,
without any errors would be HA 250(=70+180), VA 300(=360-60),
SD=143.23m. One set consists of one direct and one reverse
measurement. These measurements are used to eliminate the Vertical
circle centering errors.

Figure 8-39. Sideshot-Direct/Reverse

1. If necessary, change the measurement mode. Tap the

button, and select the mode in Meas Method.
2. Perform the sideshot survey as described in “Sideshot (Topo)
Survey” on page 8-38, taking any measurements necessary.
3. Move to the next point and repeat these steps. The last recorded
measurement is displayed on the Data tab.

P/N 7010-0945 8-41

SSF_UM_um.book Page 42 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

4. If a point location is unreachable, set offset parameters as

described above.

Angle/Distance Sets
If the measurement mode is Ang/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev (performed using
the Ang/Dist Sets-Dir/Rev screen), the instrument uses the specified
Angle sequence to perform repeated measurements. A sequence of
four measurements constitutes one set. One example sequence is:
• (1) the measurement of the sideshot in direct face
• (2) then the measurement of the backsight in direct face
• (3) then the measurement of the backsight in reverse face
• (4) finally the measurement of the sideshot in reverse face
1. To change the measurement mode, tap and pick the desired
mode.
2. Perform the sideshot survey as described in “Sideshot (Topo)
Survey” on page 8-38, taking any measurements necessary.
3. The last recorded measurement is displayed on the Data tab.
4. Tap the Accept button to measurements in the set when it is
complete.
5. If a point location is unreachable, set offset parameters as
described above.

Resection
The coordinates of the unknown point at which the total station is set
can be calculated by resection when the number of points of a known
position are observed. The location by resection can be performed
when a minimum of two points of known coordinates are observed.
1. Add the points of known coordinates to the Point List.
2. Tap Setup Resection (Figure 8-40). This function is also
available from the Backsight Survey screen. Tap Setup
Backsight, then tap the menu icon and select the
Resection item (Figure 8-34 on page 8-37).

8-42 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 43 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

3. Set the name of the occupation point, the heights of the

instrument and the target. Tap Next.

Figure 8-40. Occupation Point

Only in Robotic mode the user can use GPS

NOTICE positions instead of pre-defined control points for
calculating the resection task.

4. On the Resection 3D screen (Figure 8-41), select the point of

known coordinates from the map or from the list.

Figure 8-41. Resection

5. Select the Options item from the Help Icon menu in the upper-
left corner of the Resection 3D screen.

P/N 7010-0945 8-43

SSF_UM_um.book Page 44 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

6. In the Resection Options screen (Figure 8-42), choose whether:

• To calculate the height (3D) or just the horizontal coordinates
(2D). The 2D/3D option is retained between sessions to do a new
resection with the previously used setting.
• To calculate 3D resection using horizontal coordinates and
heights separately (2D+H) or jointly (3D Combined).
• To set your own values of accuracy for distance and angle
measurements.

Figure 8-42. Resection Options

7. Aim the instrument at the point and enter the reflector height.
Then tap the button to take the sideshot to the point.
8. Repeat the procedure for the remaining known points.
9. Open the Set tab (Figure 8-43).
10. Tap the Accept button. The coordinates of unknown points
will be calculated. In the screen that displays, enter the name of
the calculated point and tap the ok button . The point will
be added to the Point List.

8-44 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 45 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Figure 8-43. Set Tab

Resection from GPS Points

In Robotic mode, you can use GPS measured points for resection of
TS occupation point. This is only available if the user has defined a
project using grid to ground or localization.
1. Check mark the Enable GPS box to use GPS positions for
resection (Figure 8-44). You can use Bluetooth connection to
get GPS positions.

Figure 8-44. Enable GPS

2. Set the offset from the prism to the Reference Point (ARP) of
GPS antenna attached to the prism road. Tap Next.

P/N 7010-0945 8-45

SSF_UM_um.book Page 46 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

3. Take GPS measurement of the points with GPS antenna

attached to the prism rod (see Figure 8-45 on page 8-46).
– Check mark the Measure GPS box. The status bar will show
information about GPS solution.
– Press to save a measurement. If necessary, the logged
measurement can be deleted by pressing the red icon.

Figure 8-45. Measure GPS

4. Clear the Measure GPS box and take TS measurements as

usual with a robotic total station (Figure 8-46).

Figure 8-46. Resection in Robotic Mode

The Measurement tab shows the current values of the total station
measurements and provides a set of tools for control. The arrow
button toggles between the total station status icons and search icons.

8-46 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 47 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Status icons:
• – shows the battery status for the total station.

• – shows the status of communication between the controller

and total station.
• – shows battery and memory status for the controller.

• – displays the current prism offset in use.

• / – switches on/off the arrow keys on the keypad to

adjust the rotation up, down, left, or right.
Search icons:

• – will trigger the RC-2/RC-31 to perform the “Quicklock” or

“Turn Around” command.

• – causes the instrument to perform a standard search for the

prism.

• – will lock onto the prism that is in the field of view or

“track” it without searching.

• – opens the Rotate dialog (Figure 8-51 on page 8-51), which

allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points.

• – interrupts the total station and stop it from searching the

prism and turning; the instrument will go into “Standby” mode.

1. RC-2/RC-3 is the Remote Control System 2 or 3 for optical

communications. For instructions of how to operate the RC-2/RC-3
device, consult the instruction manual for RC-2/RC-3.

P/N 7010-0945 8-47

SSF_UM_um.book Page 48 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Remote Benchmarks
The elevation or height of the point at which the instrument is set can
be calculated when two or more points of known coordinates are
observed.
1. Add the points of known coordinates to the Point List.
2. Tap Setup Remote BM. This function is also available from
the Backsight Survey screen. Select the Setup Backsight
icons, then tap the icon menu next to the Map icon in the Occ.
Point field and select the Elevation item (Figure 8-34 on
page 8-37).
3. On the Elevation screen set the occupation point for which the
elevation will be calculated (Figure 8-47), tap Next.

Figure 8-47. Unknown Elevation

8-48 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 49 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

4. On the Known Elev screen (Figure 8-47), select the point of

known coordinates from the map or from the list.

Figure 8-48. Known Elevation

5. Aim the instrument at the point and enter the height of the rod
(target). Tap the button to take the sideshot to the point
6. Repeat the procedure for the remaining known points.
7. Open the Set tab in the Known Elev screen (Figure 8-49 on
page 8-49), tap the Accept button. The vertical coordinate of
unknown points will be calculated.

Figure 8-49. Calculate Vertical Coordinates for Unknown Points

P/N 7010-0945 8-49

SSF_UM_um.book Page 50 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

8. In the Store Point screen that displays, enter the name of the
point and tap .

Remote Control
If the survey process is performed by one person with a robotic
instrument, the remote control is used for the transmission of the
commands from the controller to the total station. The radio modems
need to be set and connected to the controller and the instrument.
1. Tap Setup Remote Control (Figure 8-50).

Figure 8-50. Remote Control

2. On the Remote Cntrl screen, you can make the instrument

search for the target (with the Search icon), lock on the
target (with the Lock icon), stop rotating (with the Stop
icon) and rotate to a pre-defined angle (with the Turn
icon). The icon will trigger the RC-2/RC-3 to perform the
“Quicklock” or “Turn Around” command.
3. Tap the Turn icon. The Rotate screen displays.
4. Enter the following rotation angles on the Rotate screen
(Figure 8-51 on page 8-51).

8-50 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 51 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

• Tap the Turn button on the Rotation Angles panel to rotate

the instrument. The instrument can also be made to rotate to a
point.
• On the Rotate to Point panel, enter a point name, or choose
one from the map or a list, and tap the Turn button.
• To Plunge the instrument (rotate the telescope and the body
by 180 degrees), tap the Plunge TS button.
All the observations can be done in the remote mode as well, if
the instrument chosen is robotic.

Figure 8-51. Rotate

Cross-Section
A cross-section survey is performed to obtain the coordinates of
points that lie on a plane perpendicular to a center line. This type of
survey is typically performed by moving from one side of a road to
the other in the cross-sectional plane, and then crossing back in the
opposite direction at a different location along the road. This process
is repeated at different stations along the centerline, until all the
desired cross-sectional points have been observed.
1. To start working, tap Survey X-Section (Figure 8-52 on
page 8-52).

P/N 7010-0945 8-51

SSF_UM_um.book Page 52 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

2. On the Cross Section screen (Figure 8-52 on page 8-52), select

or enter the following parameters for the station where the
survey will be performed, then tap : the road name, the
code and attributes of the center line, the station where the cross
section is surveyed, and the interval distance to the next station.
If the road has not been created, define the plane.

Figure 8-52. Cross Section

The Station and Interval fields appear only if the

NOTICE
road is selected.

3. In the XSect-Dir screen (Figure 8-53 on page 8-53) perform the

usual observation work, relative to the cross-section, as
described in “Measuring Sideshot Sets” on page 8-41. The only
difference lies in the presence of the Cur Stn button, which
makes the measurement, but unlike the button does not
store the point (Figure 8-53 on page 8-53).
4. Cross-sectional points at the same station should have different
codes, with at least one of them having the centerline code. For
example codes for cross-sectional points could be A, B, C, cl,
D, E, F, in the order of survey. After the button is tapped,
the station number automatically changes. Also, the application

8-52 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 53 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

automatically uses the same codes, but in the opposite order for
the next station (F, E, D, cl, C, B, A). The station and the codes
can be changed.

Figure 8-53. XSect-Direct

Find Station
The Find Station task is used for the identification of the station by
computing the distance from the beginning of the road to the
projection of the station to the road, and the offset of the station from
the center line of the road.

P/N 7010-0945 8-53

SSF_UM_um.book Page 54 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

1. To start working, tap Survey Find Station (see Figure 8-54).

Figure 8-54. Find Station – Measurement Tab

2. If needed, set the backsight point. Tap the BS Setup button and
follow the instructions in “Backsight Survey” on page 8-36.
3. Enter the road, the name and the code of the point and the
height of the rod (target) (Figure 8-54 on page 8-54).
4. To compute the result with an existing point, tap the Pt Stn
button.
5. To compute the result with the coordinates of the current
location, without storing the point, tap the Curr Stn button.
6. To take a sideshot and store the coordinates to a point, and
compute the result with this point, tap the button.

8-54 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 55 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Tape Dimension
Use the Tape Dimension task to calculate the periphery of structures
such as buildings that have features perpendicular to each other. This
is done using tape measurements, relative to the two known points
that belong to one side of the structure (wall of the building), forming
the so called reference line.
1. To start working, tap Survey Tape Dimension (Figure 8-55).

Figure 8-55. Tape Dimension – Ref Line Tab

2. On the Tape Dimension tab, set the parameters for performing

the survey: the name and code of the surveyed point, and the
direction (left or right of the previous line) and the distance of
the movement from the previous point (Figure 8-56).

P/N 7010-0945 8-55

SSF_UM_um.book Page 56 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

3. To apply the taped distance to the perimeter line, tap the

Accept button.

Figure 8-56. Tape Dimension – Tape Dim Tab

4. You can close the Tape Dimension work in one of two ways:
• To connect the first and the last point with a line, tap Finish
and select Close Polygon from the menu.
• To calculate the difference between the first and last point,
tap Finish and select Calc Closure from the menu.

Missing Line
The Missing Line task emulates the total station measurement from
one point to another and stores the result to the Raw Data database.
1. To start working, tap Survey Missing Line (Figure 8-57 on
page 8-57).
2. Enter the Start and End points names and codes (Figure 8-57).
To measure the point, tap the Meas button in the corresponding
field.
3. The Data tab displays the results of the measurements (the
measurement is performed when the Data tab is chosen). The
same result is reflected in the Raw Data screen, with the type
MLM.

8-56 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 57 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Figure 8-57. Missing Line – Ref Line Tab

Auto Topo
This function is activated only with Robotic instruments, and collects
points by Time and Distance.
1. To open the Auto Topo screen, tap Survey Auto Topo in the
Robotic mode.

Figure 8-58. Auto Topo

P/N 7010-0945 8-57

SSF_UM_um.book Page 58 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

1. Enter the point name, code and the height of the rod
(Figure 8-58).
2. To set the Auto Topo method and interval, tap the button
and enter the desired values in the corresponding fields in the
second Mode screen. Tap to save the changes and return
to the Auto Topo screen.
3. Tap the Start button (after tapping, the button changes to
“Stop”) and begin moving.
4. To store the current position, tap the Log Now button.
5. To make the instrument search for the prism, tap the Search
button.
6. To lock onto the prism that is in the field of view or “track” it
without searching, tap the Lock icon.
7. To send the “Quicklock” or “Turn Around” command, which
will cause the Total Station to search for the RC-2/RC-31, tap
the Qlock icon.
8. To turn the Total Station, tap the Turn icon and enter the
desired horizontal and vertical angles, or the direction point on
the Rotate screen. Tap Turn in the corresponding field to
perform the rotation (Figure 8-59 on page 8-59).
Tap to return to the Auto Topo screen.
9. To stop tracking the prism and take the “Standby” mode, tap
the Stop icon.

1. RC-2/RC-3 is the Remote Control System 2/3 for optical

communications. For instructions of how to operate the RC-2/RC-3
device, consult the instruction manual for RC-2/RC-3.

8-58 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 59 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Figure 8-59. Rotate

Scanning
This function is activated only with Robotic and Motorized
reflectorless total stations, and can collect points with or without
using images.
1. To open the Scanning screen, tap Survey Scanning in the
Robotic mode (Figure 8-60).

Figure 8-60. Select Scanning Type

P/N 7010-0945 8-59

SSF_UM_um.book Page 60 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

2. On the Scanning screen, select a desired scan type, either Scan

with Image or Scan w/o Image, and tap Next (Figure 8-60).

In order to import an image into SSF to scan, the

NOTICE image must be captured with a calibrated, fixed
focal length camera.

Scanning with Images

On the Select Scan screen (Figure 8-61), enter the following scan
session parameters.
1. Select a name for the session from the Session drop-down list.
2. Select a previous Image from the Image drop-down list or
browse for a new one (images are stored as JPEG with file
extension *.jpg).
3. If the image exists in the Job, then the Camera information will
be automatically selected. Otherwise, select a previous Camera
from the Camera drop-down list or browse for a new one
(Cameras are stored as a text file with the extension *.cmr).
4. Once all fields are filled, click Next.

Figure 8-61. Enter Scan Session Information

• Click the View button to open the Orient screen (Figure 8-62 on
page 8-61). This screen displays the image, along with orientation
and scanned points for completed scan sessions.

8-60 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 61 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Figure 8-62. View Completed Scan Session

5. Perform image orientation. On the Orientation screen

(Figure 8-63), associate a position on the image (x,y) with a
known coordinate (N,E,Z).

Figure 8-63. Perform Orientation

• The Pan button enables drag control of the image. When

disabled , tap on the image in the general area of where the
orientation point is located. The image will zoom to this point and
show a crosshair (Figure 8-64 on page 8-62).

P/N 7010-0945 8-61

SSF_UM_um.book Page 62 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Figure 8-64. Select Orientation Point

• To view the image, select one of the two options from the drop-
down list in the bottom left corner of the screen:
– Tele (telescope) is the default zoomed-in view of the
crosshair (Figure 8-64)
– Wide View zooms out and shows the area of the image which
contains the orientation point (Figure 8-65).

Figure 8-65. Select Orientation Point – Wide View

• Adjust the position of the crosshair.

8-62 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 63 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

– When the Arrow button is enabled , use the arrow keys

on the keypad to move the crosshair up, down, left, or right.

– Use the button to move the crosshair to the center of a

circular object on the image. First tap somewhere inside the
circular object. The object should be a well-defined circle
with high contrast between the inside and outside of the
circle.

• Use the bitmap menu options (Meas, From Map, From List)
to take a measurement or to select an existing point from a map or
list.
• To delete the selected orientation points, select the points and tap
the Delete button on the Orientation Res screen
(Figure 8-66).

Figure 8-66. Delete Orientation Points

• When four or more orientation points have been established, tap

the Next button on the Orient screen (Figure 8-67 on page 8-64)
to display the orientation results.

P/N 7010-0945 8-63

SSF_UM_um.book Page 64 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Figure 8-67. Calculate Image Orientation

6. View the image orientation results on the Orient Res screen

(Figure 8-68). The results for each Orientation Point is
displayed as dX and dY in image pixels.

Figure 8-68. Orientation Results

• Tap Back to continue to the Scan screen to select areas for

scanning.
• To adjust the orientation calculation, select a point and tap
Delete. If four points still remain, the new results are displayed.
If there are less than four orientation points, then the results

8-64 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 65 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

screen will automatically close to continue the orientation

procedure.
7. Select one or more areas to scan, using one of the following two
methods and then begin the scan.
• Scanning method A: Draw a rectangle by tapping the stylus on
the screen for the start point and dragging to the end point. When
the stylus is lifted, the area is set.
• Scanning method B: Draw a polygon by tapping the stylus down
at each vertex. Lines will be drawn connecting each vertex to the
previous one. Tap the stylus near the first vertex to close the area.

Figure 8-69. Select Rectangular Scan Area

• Tap the Settings button to set the instrument to “Non-Prism”

mode, which is required for scanning and also to change the
measurement mode (Fine or Coarse).
• When the areas are set, tap Next to begin the scan. The Interval
screen displays to set the scanning settings (Figure 8-70 on
page 8-66).
• Tap Clear to erase all areas previously drawn.
8. Select a scanning interval. Enter the starting point name and the
horizontal and vertical intervals. The intervals can either be
entered as angles (Figure 8-70) or number of points. Tap Next.
The Estimate Time screen displays (Figure 8-71).

P/N 7010-0945 8-65

SSF_UM_um.book Page 66 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Figure 8-70. Select Scanning Interval

View the time estimate. Before scanning begins, the scanning

information is displayed including the total number of points to be
scanned and an estimate of the time it will take to complete the scan.

Figure 8-71. Estimate Time

9. If the estimated time is too long, click and enter larger

intervals. Finally, click to begin scanning points.
10. View the scanning in progress. As the total station measures
points within the pre-defined area, each point will display on
the image (Figure 8-72). If necessary, click Stop to stop the
scan.

8-66 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 67 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

Figure 8-72. Scanning with Images

Scanning Without Images

1. Set the type of scan orientation and tap Next to select the scan
area on the Area screen (Figure 8-73).

Figure 8-73. Select Orientation Type

2. Select the Scanning Area on the Area screen (Figure 8-74 on

page 8-68). The starting and ending points for the scanning area
can be selected from the Point List or Map, or measured
(Figure 8-74). When finished, click Next.

P/N 7010-0945 8-67

SSF_UM_um.book Page 68 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Figure 8-74. Select Area

3. The same Interval and Time Estimate screens will be displayed

(Figure 8-70 on page 8-66 and Figure 8-71 on page 8-66).
4. View the scanning in progress. As the total station measures
points within the pre-defined area, each point will display on
the screen (Figure 8-75).

Figure 8-75. Scanning without Images

• Tap Clear to remove measured points from the screen and

return to the Area screen.

8-68 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 69 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Total Station Surveys

• Tap Stop to immediately stop the scan and return to the Area
screen.
5. After scanning is completed, the screen returns to the Area
screen to set a new area for scanning. The icon denotes the
scanned points in the list of points.

To show scan points in the list of job points, make

NOTICE sure the Show Scan Points item is check marked in
the pop-up menu in the upper-left corner of the
Points screen.

Monitor
The Monitor function measures one or more prisms repeatedly and
uses the measurements to detect changes in the position of the prisms.
The measurements are recorded into the raw data file.
1. Set the format and destination for the output file in the Monitor
Options screen which is accessed from the context menu in the
upper-left corner of the Configure Instrument dialog box
(Figure 8-76).

Figure 8-76. Monitor Options

Optionally, the raw measurements or the computed points can be

output to a file or communication port in either FC-6 or GTS-7
formats.

P/N 7010-0945 8-69

SSF_UM_um.book Page 70 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

The available options vary, depending on whether a file or a

COM port is selected. In the case of file output, one can browse
for the destination of the file using the List […] button
2. Add the points to be measured to a point list. The list is then
used in monitoring the survey.
3. Tap Survey Monitor (Figure 8-77). The Monitor Pointlist
screen opens to load the desired point list (Figure 8-77).

Figure 8-77. Monitor Point List

4. After the point list is selected, tap the Next button. Another
Monitor screen displays (Figure 8-78 on page 8-71).
5. Tap the button to initiate the sequence of measurements
which repeats at the desired interval listed as the Cycle Time.
If a prism cannot be found after a period of 15 seconds, the total
station will rotate to the next point in the sequence. If “ON” is
selected from the Auto field drop-down list, the total station
automatically rotates to the next point in the sequence and
records a measurement. If it is set to “OFF”, the total station
rotates to the point, but allows you to verify or correct the
centering to the prism prior to taking a measurement. The
monitor function will always complete the entire sequence,
even if the measurements take longer than the cycle time.

8-70 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 71 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Level Surveys

Figure 8-78. Monitor

6. View the data displayed in the Data tab. The values listed are
the differences between the coordinates of the reference point
and the measured point.

Performing Level Surveys

After completing preliminary work (that is, the instrument is leveled
in a desired location above the reference point and the controller is
connected to the instrument with the cable), the survey can begin.
First, if needed, perform the Two Peg Test to check if the line of sight
of the level telescope is horizontal when the instrument is leveled.
Then perform Level Run in appropriate sideshot survey mode (single
or multiple). Refer to “Config: Survey Parameters – Level” in the
SSF Reference Manual for details.

P/N 7010-0945 8-71

SSF_UM_um.book Page 72 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Two Peg Test

To execute the Two Peg Test, tap Survey Two Peg Test
(Figure 8-79 on page 8-72).
The Two Peg Test screen guides you through a series of
measurements to help determine any errors.
1. First, take shots to the first point assuming the level is fairly
centered between the two points.

Figure 8-79. Take Peg 1 Reading

8-72 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 73 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Level Surveys

2. Then move the instrument to one of the pegs and take the shots
again to Pegs 1 and 2 (Figure 8-80).

Figure 8-80. Take Peg 2 Reading

• Tap the Locate Peg2 button to measure the horizontal

distance to Peg2 and compare it with the already taken
measurement to Peg1. This measurement is not used in the
error computations.
• Tap the Meas button to take measurements for the displayed
prompted Peg (Figure 8-80 on page 8-73). The Two Peg Test
Results screen displays.
The Two Peg Test Results screen (Figure 8-81) displays the results of
the test after all measurements are taken. The computed error means

P/N 7010-0945 8-73

SSF_UM_um.book Page 74 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

inclination of the actual line of sight from true horizontal. This error
is proportional to the distance from the level to the rod.

Figure 8-81. Two Peg Test Results

Level Run
To set up a Level Run, tap Survey Level Run (Figure 8-82 on
page 8-74). The Level Run screen displays.
1. Type in a name for the level run and any additional information
on this level, if needed. Tap Next.

Figure 8-82. New Level Run

8-74 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 75 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Level Surveys

Tap on the DL tab to display all leveling data in progress

(Figure 8-83).

Figure 8-83. Leveling

2. Select the point for a rod reading in the field. Select it from
the map or from the list of points.
3. Set the code for the measured point in the field. Use the
bitmap menu next to the field to set a new code.
4. Use an appropriate tool to make leveling measurements:
• BS – usually sighting back along the leveling line, the Level
takes a rod reading on a point of known elevation.
• SS – the Level takes a sideshot to the point.
• FS – the Level takes a rod reading on a point of unknown
elevation.

P/N 7010-0945 8-75

SSF_UM_um.book Page 76 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Tap on the Data tab to view information related to the current

measurement (Figure 8-84).

Figure 8-84. Data Level Run

5. Use the Vertical Offset option from the bitmap in the upper-left
corner of the screen to set the vertical offset to apply at the
point.
6. To select the columns and the order of the columns to display in
the fieldbook, use the Display Settings option from the bitmap
in the upper-left corner of the screen
(Figure 8-85 on page 8-76).

Figure 8-85. Change Display Columns

8-76 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 77 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Performing Level Surveys

7. To display the SumBS-SumFS measurement, select the Show

SumBS-SumFS option from the bitmap in the upper-left corner
of the screen.
8. Use the Inverse option to perform the Two-Point Inverse cogo
computation.
9. Select a stakeout option from the bitmap in the upper-left
corner of the screen for DL survey mode to stake a Point, Point
List or Elevation. Staked points are not added to the level run,
they are independent.

P/N 7010-0945 8-77

SSF_UM_um.book Page 78 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Surveying with Spectrum Survey Field

Notes:

8-78 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 9

Staking Out
The Stakeout process involves finding points near a desired location.
The preliminary work for GPS, Total Station, and Digital Level
stakeout is similar to that for the Survey work.
The stakeout function can be accessed from the Stakeout menu or
from the Main Map.
When in the Main Map, tap the desired object to highlight it. Then
hold the stylus on the selected object until a pop-up menu displays
(Figure 9-1). The menu options depend on the object selected. Select
the appropriate item from the pop-up menu.

Figure 9-1. Stakeout from Main View

P/N 7010-0945 9-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Stakeout a Point
1. Tap Stake Points. The Stakeout Pt screen displays. See
Figure 9-2 on page 9-2.
2. On the Stakeout Pt screen, tap the button.

Figure 9-2. Stakeout Point

3. To stake out a point for GPS+ do the following:

• On the Stk Parms screen, specify the following stakeout
parameters: enter the horizontal distance tolerance (Hz Dist

9-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout a Point

Tolerance), select the Reference Direction, and select the

Solution Type value. Then tap the ok button (Figure 9-3).

Figure 9-3. Stakeout Parameters - GPS+ mode

4. To display the icon for the staked point on the map, select the
Display option from the bitmap menu in the upper-left corner
of the Stk Parms screen (Figure 9-4). In the Staked Point Icon
screen, set appropriate parameters for the icon.
5. To stake out a point for the TS: set the horizontal distance
tolerance and reference direction. Also, select the manner in

P/N 7010-0945 9-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

which the Total Station should be turned towards the design

point. Then tap the ok button.

Figure 9-4. Stakeout Parameters – TS mode

6. On the Stakeout Point screen:

• Select the design point from the list or a map, or insert the name
manually.
• Specify the antenna parameters: the height value and type or the
height of the rod, based on whether you are in GPS+ mode or TS
mode.
• Check if the PTL Point Stakeout is performed.
• Set the current stake report. Select it from a predefined list using
the button. For details on stake report configuration, see
“Configuring Stake Reports” on page 4-88.

Stake Reports are available for setting in all stake

NOTICE routines. To view the report, select the View Report
option from the bitmap menu in the upper-left
corner of any stake screen.

• Tap the Stake button (Figure 9-2 on page 9-2).

9-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout a Point

GPS Stakeout
7. For GPS+: use the information on the Stakeout screen for
finding the target point (Figure 9-5). Tap after the location
is close enough to the design point. Tap the button to
change the design point (increment to the next point in the data
set) of the stakeout.

Figure 9-5. GPS Stakeout

TS Stakeout
8. For TS: sight the prism. On the Stake screen (Figure 9-6 on
page 9-6), use the button to take a measurement and then
show the current position relative to the design point.
9. Use the EDM button to select distance measurement mode.
Tapping the button causes a measurement to be taken, and
the computed coordinates to be stored to a point.
Tap the desired button from to stakeout the next
(increment to the next point in the data set) point in the data set
or return to the previous one.

P/N 7010-0945 9-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-6. TS Stakeout

10. For Robotic TS: you can use the search icons to control TS.

Figure 9-7. Stakeout with Robotic

• – will trigger the RC-2/RC-31 to perform the “Quicklock” or

“Turn Around” command.

1. RC-2/RC-3 is the Remote Control System 2 or 3 for optical

communications. For instructions of how to operate the RC-2/RC-3
device, consult the instruction manual for RC-2/RC-3.

9-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout a Point

• – causes the instrument to perform a standard search for the

prism. This function is useful for setting the stake and measuring
the final position.

• – opens the Rotate dialog (Figure 8-51 on page 8-51), which

allows the Total station to turn to various angles or points.

• – interrupts the total station and stop it from searching the

prism and turning; the instrument will go into “Standby” mode.
This function is useful for moving the pole to set the stake in the
The icon displays the current prism offset in use.
11. If the IS Robot (Live Video) instrument with WiFi connection
to the controller is used for staking, you can again use the arrow
button to open the live video of the layout of the target and
the current position shown graphically. Touch the screen and
have the instrument drive to that location.

Stakeout Views
12. You can switch views of stakeout process using the View Panel
option from the pop-up menu on the top left corner of the
screen.

The same context menu can be accessed by holding

TIP T the stylus in the map area on the Stake screen. The
last view mode is recalled between sessions.

P/N 7010-0945 9-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

• Select Data View to display all possible data of staking.

Figure 9-8. Data View of Stakeout

• Normal View is default that shows graphic and text live values of
stakeout (see for example Figure 9-5 on page 9-5).
• Select Overhead View to display the graphical view of the layout
of the target and current position (Figure 9-9 on page 9-8).

Figure 9-9. Overhead View of Stakeout

• Select Map View to display the full screen graphical view of the
whole job with the highlighted design point and current position.

9-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout a Point

User definable labels

Figure 9-10. Map View of Stakeout

Stakeout Values
13. All graphical views contain four user definable labels for
showing any live value (see Figure 9-10). You can tap on one
of them to change it on the Select Value screen (Figure 9-11 on
page 9-9).
Highlight a desired value and press the ok button to display
instead of that you clicked.

Figure 9-11. Select Value

P/N 7010-0945 9-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Changing Rod Height

14. You are able to change the rod height either directly on the
stakeout navigation screen or using the Rod Height option from
the pop-up menu opened with the Help icon on the top left
corner of the screen.

Figure 9-12. Enter Rod Height

Store Point Information

15. Select the Design Pt/Layer option from the menu popped up
after tapping the bitmap in the upper-left corner of the Stakeout
screen. In the Store Design Point screen (Figure 9-13), select
the layer from the drop down list or tap the List button to
edit layers.

9-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout a Point

Figure 9-13. Select Layer for Staked Point

Display Store Pt Info is enabled by default to display information on

the staked point before storing it. Check the Advance box to open the
Stake screen automatically for the next point.

Figure 9-14. Store Point

The Store Pt Info screen allows editing the current staked point
properties (on the Stake, Code and Note tabs), shows the stakeout
report for this point (on the Data tab), and allows setting properties of
the calculated design point, when applicable, for example in the Line
& Offsets stakeout task.

P/N 7010-0945 9-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Design Offsets
16. To change the elevation of the staked point, select the Design
Offsets option from the Help Icon menu in the upper-left corner
of the Stakeout screen. Check and enable the Design Elev box
in the Design Elevation screen to manually edit the elevation
value (Figure 9-15).

Figure 9-15. Design Elevation

Stakeout a Point in Direction

Perform a Stakeout Point in Direction task when the location of the
design point is unknown, but can be computed with distance and
angle offsets from a known point.
1. To perform a Point and Direction stakeout, tap Stake Point in
Direction (Figure 9-16).
2. In the Stakeout Point & Direction screen, enter the starting
point name (known point), the azimuth set by value or as the
direction to another known point, the angle offset from the
azimuth line, the distance offset along the angle offset line, the
height offset, and the parameters of antenna (GPS mode) or the
height of the rod (target) (TS mode).
Enter the name of the stakeout point in the Store Pt field. Tap
the Stakeout button (Figure 9-16 on page 9-13).

9-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout a Point in Direction

Figure 9-16. Stakeout Point & Direction

3. For GPS+: use the information on the Stakeout screen to find

the target. Tap Store once the position is close enough to the
desired one (Figure 9-17).

Figure 9-17. Stakeout Point & Direction – Stakeout

4. For TS: sight the prism. In the Stakeout screen tap the Cur Pos
button to check the position. Use the EDM button to select
distance measurement mode: Coarse, Fine or Coarse Tracking.
Once the position is close enough to the desired one, tap to
store it (Figure 9-18).

P/N 7010-0945 9-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-18. Stakeout Point & Direction – Stakeout

Stakeout a Point List

1. To stake out points in a point list, tap Stake Point List
(Figure 9-19).

Figure 9-19. Stakeout Point List

2. In the Stakeout Point List screen, select a pre-existing points

list, set the antenna parameters (GPS mode): height of the
antenna reference point (ARP) above the mark and the type, or

9-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 15 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout a Line

the height of the rod (target) (TS mode).

To perform a stakeout, starting from the end of the Point List,
check and enable the Reverse Order box. Use the arrow buttons
to modify stakeout order. Then tap the Stakeout button
(Figure 9-19 on page 9-14).
3. For GPS+: use the information on the Stakeout screen for
finding the target. Tap after the position is close enough to
the designed point. To move to the next point, tap the
button.
4. For TS: sight the prism. On the Stakeout screen tap the
button to check the position. Once the position is close enough
to the desired one, tap to store it. To move to the next
point, tap the button.
5. To stakeout another Point List, tap to return to the
Stakeout Point List screen and select another point list.

Stakeout a Line
1. To stake points along a line, tap Stake Lines (Figure 9-20).
2. On the Stakeout Line screen (Figure 9-20 on page 9-16),
specify the reference line by choosing the start point and either
the end point or the azimuth. Currently, the stakeout points
have the same height as the starting point. Also, specify the
antenna parameters (GPS+ mode), or the height of the rod (TS
mode). Tap the Stake button.

P/N 7010-0945 9-15

SSF_UM_um.book Page 16 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-20. Stakeout Line

3. For GPS+: use the information on the Stakeout Line screen for
finding the target line. Tap after the point is close enough
to the line and at the desired distance from the starting point
(Figure 9-21).

Figure 9-21. Stakeout Line

4. For TS: sight the prism. On the Stake Point screen, tap the
button to check the position (Figure 9-22). Once the position is
close enough to the line and at the desired distance from the
starting point, tap to store it.

9-16 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 17 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout a Curve

Figure 9-22. Stakeout Line

5. Tap the button to return to the first Stakeout Line screen.

Enter parameters for the next reference line.

Stakeout a Curve
1. To stake out points along a horizontal curve, tap
Stake Curves (Figure 9-23 on page 9-18).
2. On the Curve screen (Figure 9-23 on page 9-18), specify the
reference curve by choosing the starting point (Point of
Curvature), the ending point (Point of Tangency) and the radius
parameter of the curve at the end point. The stakeout points
have the same height as the starting point. Also, specify
whether the curve turns right or left and whether to use a small
or large part of the circle. Enter the antenna parameters (GPS+
mode), or the height of the rod (TS mode). Tap the Stake
button.

P/N 7010-0945 9-17

SSF_UM_um.book Page 18 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-23. Curve

3. For GPS+: use the information on the Stakeout Curve screen to

find the target curve (Figure 9-24). Tap after the point is
close enough to the curve and at the desired distance from the
starting point.

Figure 9-24. Stakeout Curve

4. For TS: sight the prism. On the Stake Point screen, tap the
button to check the position (Figure 9-25). Once the position is
close enough to the curve and at the desired distance from the
starting point, tap to store it.

9-18 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 19 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Offsets

Figure 9-25. Stakeout Curve

Stakeout Offsets
With offsets, you can stake Line, Intersection, Curve, 3 Pt Curves, or
Spiral.

Line & Offset

When the desired points lie at regular intervals on a line that is
parallel to a known line, and is at a known horizontal and vertical
distance from it, the Stakeout Line & Offset task should be
performed.
1. Tap Stake Offsets Line (Figure 9-26 on page 9-20).
2. In the Line&Ofst (Stakeout Line & Offset) screen, set the
direction of the line, the type of height computations for the
stakeout point (currently the stakeout point will have the same
height as the starting point of the line), the number of
subdivisions of the line (if an end point is specified) and the
starting station (chainage) of the line. Tap Next (Figure 9-26 on
page 9-20).

P/N 7010-0945 9-19

SSF_UM_um.book Page 20 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-26. Stakeout Line & Offset Parameters

3. In the Sta&Ofst (Station & Offsets) screen, set the station along
the line being staked, the station staking interval, the right or
left offset of the stakeout point with respect to the line, the Up
or Down Height offset, the height and the type of the antenna
height (GPS mode), or the height of the rod (target) (TS mode).
If the number of segments has been selected, the station
interval is automatically computed and cannot be changed
(Figure 9-27).

Figure 9-27. Station & Offsets

9-20 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 21 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Offsets

4. For GPS+: use the information on the Stakeout screen for

finding the target. Tap after the position is close enough to
the desired point. Tap the / buttons to retreat/
advance the station by the specified Station Interval, for staking
out the previous/next station, respectively. Stations before the
beginning and past the end of the alignment can also be staked.

Figure 9-28. Stakeout GPS

5. For TS: sight the prism. On the Stake screen tap the button
to measure the target. Tap the EDM button to select distance
measurement mode, either Coarse, Fine or Coarse Tracking.
Once the position is close enough to the desired point, tap
to store it. Tap the / buttons to retreat/ advance the
station by the specified Station Interval, for staking out the
previous/next station, respectively (Figure 9-29 on page 9-22).

P/N 7010-0945 9-21

SSF_UM_um.book Page 22 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-29. Stakeout TS

Tap in the current station string to enable the

floating information screen that displays the point
T
name, the note, design elevation (if enabled), the
TIP

station number, and the offset value of the current

point.

Three Point Curve & Offsets

When the desired points lie at regular intervals on a curve that is
parallel to a curve with three known points, and is at a known
horizontal and vertical distance from it, the Stakeout Three Pt Curve
& Offsets task can be performed.
1. To stake out Three Pt Curve & Offsets, tap
Stake Offsets 3Pt Curve. The 3 Pt Curve screen displays.
2. On the 3 Pt Curve screen (Figure 9-30), enter or select from the
list or map the following sets of three known points, to create a
curve and tap Next:
• The starting PC Point (Point of Curvature) and ending PT Point
(Point of Tangency) on the circle, and a third point on the curve,
and the starting station (chainage) of the line.

9-22 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 23 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Offsets

Figure 9-30. Three Point Curve

• The starting PC Point (Point of Curvature) and ending PT Point

(Point of Tangency) on the circle, and the center point (also
called a Radius Point). For this set of points, the distance
between RP Point and PC point should be equal to the distance
between RP Point and PT point. The radius and the PC and PT
points define two curves, one with delta less than or equal to 180
degrees (Small curve), and the other with delta greater than or
equal to 180 degrees (Large curve). Select either Small or Large
from the Curve drop-down box (Figure 9-31) to indicate which of
these two curves will be used for staking and the starting station
(chainage) of the line.

P/N 7010-0945 9-23

SSF_UM_um.book Page 24 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-31. Three Points Small Curve

3. In the Sta&Ofst screen, set the station along the curve being
staked, the station staking interval, the right or left offset of the
stakeout point with respect to the curve, the Up or Down
Height offset, the height and the type of the antenna height
(GPS mode), or the height of the rod (target) (TS mode).

Figure 9-32. Station & Offsets

4. Tap the Stake button and perform the stakeout as described in

“Line & Offset” on page 9-19.

9-24 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 25 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Offsets

Intersection & Offsets

When the design point is the intersection of two lines that are parallel
to two other lines and at known horizontal distances from these, the
Stakeout Intersection & Offsets task should be performed.
1. To stake out Intersection & Offsets, tap Stake Offsets
Intersection. The Stakeout 2Line&Ofst screen displays
(Figure 9-33).
2. On the Stakeout 2Line&Ofst screen, define the starting point
and azimuth for the first known point; specify the horizontal
offset to the first parallel line. Tap Next (Figure 9-33).

Figure 9-33. Intersection & Offsets – Line 1

3. The second Stakeout 2Line&Ofst screen defines another line

(Line 2) using a point and an azimuth, and another definition of
the horizontal offset to the second parallel line (Figure 9-34 on
page 9-26). The height and name of the intersection point of
these two parallel lines (stakeout point) should be specified,
along with the height and type of the antenna (GPS+ mode), or
the height of the rod (target) (TS mode).

P/N 7010-0945 9-25

SSF_UM_um.book Page 26 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-34. Intersection & Offsets – Line 2

4. To start the stakeout, tap the Stake button.

5. For GPS+: use the information on the Stakeout screen for
finding the target. Tap after the target is close enough to
the design point (Figure 9-35).

Figure 9-35. Stakeout

6. For TS: sight the prism. In the Stakeout screen, tap the
button to check the position. Once the position is close enough
to the design point, tap to store it (Figure 9-35).

9-26 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 27 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Offsets

Figure 9-36. Stakeout.

7. Tap the button to return to the first Stakeout Line screen.

Enter parameters for the next reference line.

Curve & Offsets

When the desired points lie at regular intervals on a curve that is
parallel to a known curve, and is at a known horizontal and vertical
distance from it, the Stakeout Curve & Offset task should be
performed.
1. To stake Curve & Offsets, Stake Offsets Curve. The
Curv&Ofst screen displays.
2. On the Stakeout Curv&Ofst screen, set the parameters of the
known curve: the PC Point (Point of Curve), the starting point
of the curve, the azimuth of the tangent of the curve at the PC
point, the radius parameters of the curve, the length parameter
of the curve, the turn value of the curve, and the starting station
(chainage) of the line. Tap Next.

P/N 7010-0945 9-27

SSF_UM_um.book Page 28 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-37. Stakeout Curve & Offset

3. In the Stakeout Sta&Ofst screen (Figure 9-38 on page 9-28), set

the station along the curve being staked, the station staking
interval, the left or right offset of the stakeout point with respect
to the curve, the Up/Down Height offset, the height and the
type of the antenna height (GPS mode), or the height of the rod
(target) (TS mode).

Figure 9-38. Station & Offsets

4. Tap the Stake button and perform the stakeout as described in

“Line & Offset” on page 9-19.

9-28 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 29 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Offsets

Spiral & Offsets

When the desired points lie at regular intervals on a curve that is
parallel to a known curve, and is at a known horizontal and vertical
distance from it, the Stakeout Curve & Offset task should be
performed.
1. To stake Spiral & Offset, tap Stake Offsets Spiral. The
Stakeout
2. In the Stakeout Spiral&Ofst screen, set the parameters of the
spiral to be staked out: the starting point of the spiral, the
azimuth of the Tangent of the curve at the PC point, the radius
parameter of the spiral, the length parameter of the spiral, the
direction of turn, direction of movement of the spiral and the
starting station (chainage) of the line (Figure 9-39). The
direction values are: TS -> SC (Tangent Spiral -> Spiral
Circle), which is the incoming spiral to the internal circle, and
CS -> ST (Circle Spiral -> Spiral Tangent), which is the
exiting spiral from the circle to the Tangent. Tap Next.

Figure 9-39. Stakeout Spiral & Offset

3. In the Stakeout Sta&Ofst screen (Figure 9-40), set the station

along the spiral being staked, the station staking interval, the
left or right offset of the stakeout point with respect to the
spiral, Up or Down Height offset, the height and the type of the
antenna height (GPS mode), or the height of the rod (TS mode).

P/N 7010-0945 9-29

SSF_UM_um.book Page 30 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-40. Station and Offset

4. Tap the Stake button and perform the stakeout as described in

“Line & Offset” on page 9-19).

Stakeout Roads
1. To stake out points on a road, and on either sides of it, tap
Stake Road. On the Roads screen select the road for stakeout
and tap the ok button. The Stk Road screen displays.

Figure 9-41. Stakeout Road

9-30 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 31 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Roads

2. On the Stk Road screen (Figure 9-41), set the road, horizontal,
or horizontal and vertical alignments to be staked out and the
starting station, the height and the type of the antenna height
(GPS mode), or the height of the rod (target) (TS mode). If
staking the transition points (points where horizontal elements
of the road change and included in spite of the station distance),
check the appropriate field (Figure 9-41). Tap Next.
3. In the next Stakeout Road screen (Figure 9-42 on page 9-32),
set the properties of the cross-section on the stakeout station:
• The station where the stakeout is performed.
• The interval of the station increment.
• The hinge (end) point of the current segment. To move the
current segment point along the cross-section, use the arrow
icons next to this field. The result displays on the
scheme at the bottom of the screen.
• The horizontal offset from the current segment point, the
vertical offset from the current segment point.
• Select the reference line for offsets by selecting the type of
template offsets:
– Centerline: both the horizontal and vertical offset starts at the
centerline.
– Intersect Left: the vertical offset starts at the segment point;
the horizontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the
line parallel to the left segment with the cross-section.
– Intersect Right: the vertical offset starts at the segment point;
the horizontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the
line parallel to the right segment with the cross-section.
– Segment: the horizontal offset starts at the beginning of the
segment; the vertical offset starts at the centerline.
– Surface Left: the horizontal left offset starts at the beginning
of the segment; the vertical offset starts at the point on the
surface of the segment that corresponds with the horizontal
offset.

P/N 7010-0945 9-31

SSF_UM_um.book Page 32 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

– Surface Right: the horizontal right offset starts at the

beginning of the segment; the vertical offset starts at the point
on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the
horizontal offset.
• When Intersect Left or Right is selected, use the /
buttons to toggle between the vertical offset and offset
perpendicular to the current segment.

Figure 9-42. Stakeout Road (second screen)

4. Tap Stake, then the Stake screen opens.

• To perform road stakeout in real time, select the Real Time
Stakeout option from the pop-up menu in the top left corner of
screen.
• If the stake report is set for the current stakeout routine, the Set
References option from the pop-up menu in the top left corner of
screen allows selecting references, surfaces or segment points, for
additional reporting options. For details on the Set References
option, see page 9-35.
• Use the Initial Point Name to set the name of the first point and a
value for increment/decrement of names of points calculated for
the stakeout task (see Figure 9-51 on page 9-38).

9-32 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 33 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Slope

Stakeout Slope
1. To stake out the slope of a road, tap Stake Slope. The Stk
Slope screen displays.
2. On the Stk Slope screen, select a road/ horizontal / horizontal
and vertical alignments, the starting point of the stakeout, the
height and the type of the antenna height (GPS mode) or the
height of the rod (target) (TS mode). Tap Next.

Figure 9-43. Stakeout Slope

3. On the next Stk Slope screen (Figure 9-44), set:

• The interval of the station increment.
• The hinge point (point of rotation for the Cut/Fill Slope lines) and
the values of the Cut/Fill Slope parameters, and the offset from
the catch point (the point where the slope crosses the surface of
the terrain). Use the arrows in this field to move the hinge point
along the cross section. This is reflected on the scheme in the
bottom of this screen.
• The horizontal and vertical offsets from the current hinge point.
• When Intersect Left or Right is selected, use the /
buttons to toggle between the vertical offset and offset
perpendicular to the current segment.
• Select the type of template offsets:

P/N 7010-0945 9-33

SSF_UM_um.book Page 34 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

– Auto: automatically set the last template point (without

offsets).
– Intersect Left: the vertical offset starts at the hinge point; the
horizontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the line
parallel to the left segment with the cross-section.
– Intersect Right: the vertical offset starts at the hinge point;
the horizontal offset starts at the point of intersection of the
line parallel to the right segment with the cross-section.
– Segment: the horizontal offset starts at the beginning of the
segment; the vertical offset starts at the centerline.
– Surface Left: the horizontal left offset starts at the beginning
of the segment; the vertical offset starts at the point on the
surface of the segment that corresponds with the horizontal
offset.
– Surface Right: the horizontal right offset starts at the
beginning of the segment; the vertical offset starts at the point
on the surface of the segment that corresponds with the
horizontal offset.

Figure 9-44. Stakeout Slope

• Tap Next.
4. The next Stk Slope screen allows editing cut/fill slope to stake.

9-34 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 35 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Slope

Figure 9-45. Set Cut/Fill Slope

5. Tap Stakeout to stakeout the catch point (the point where the
slope crosses the surface of the terrain)
• To perform slope stakeout in real time, select the Real Time
Stakeout option from the pop-up menu in the top left corner of
screen.
• The Set References option from the pop-up menu in the top left
corner of screen allows selecting references, surfaces or segment
points, for additional reporting options.

Figure 9-46. Set References

P/N 7010-0945 9-35

SSF_UM_um.book Page 36 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Tap desired surfaces or points to highlight them in green, then

click the ok button to save the selections and to return to the
Stake screen.

Figure 9-47. GPS Stakeout

Tap the button on the Stake screen to save positions as

points. The Data tab on the Store Point dialog before saving.

Figure 9-48. Store Staked Point for Slope

9-36 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 37 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Slope

You can tap the Set Ref button to view/edit the references on the
Set Reference map. The green color of the Set Ref button means
that the references are already defined.
Check mark the Stk Offset Pt box to enable setting an offset to
the catch point in the field below. This option is appropriate only
to slope stakeout.
Clicking the ok button on the Store Point screen saves the
point and reporting data to the stake report, if available.
• The View Report option from the pop-up menu in the top left
corner of screen displays the full current report (also the
button on the initial Stk Slope screen allows viewing reports).

Figure 9-49. Report View

The Refs button displays the References data for the highlighted
design point.

The Refs button appears only if there are set

NOTICE references, and is active only for design points with
references.

P/N 7010-0945 9-37

SSF_UM_um.book Page 38 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Figure 9-50. References

• Use the Initial Point Name to set the name of the first point and a
value for increment/decrement of names of points calculated for
the stakeout task.

Figure 9-51. Initial Point Name

9-38 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 39 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Real Time Road

Stakeout Real Time Road

1. To stake out points on a road, and on either sides of it, tap
Stake Real Time Road.
2. On the Stk Road screen (Figure 9-53), set the road to be staked
out and the starting station, the height and the type of the
antenna (GPS mode), or the height of the rod (TS mode). If
staking the transition points (points where horizontal elements
of the road change), check the appropriate field. Tap Next.

Figure 9-52. Stakeout Road

P/N 7010-0945 9-39

SSF_UM_um.book Page 40 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

3. The Stk Road screen displays the cross-section segment at the

rod position, tap Next.

Figure 9-53. Stakeout Road

• Another Stk Road screen shows cut/fill for template slopes, and
allows editing cut/fill slope to stake.

Figure 9-54. Stakeout Road – Cut/Fill

4. Tap Stakeout. The Stake screen reports the cut/fill values

computed for the current observed point. The design elevation
of the road is automatically calculated for the observed point,
using the alignment and templates.

9-40 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 41 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Real Time Road

5. For GPS+: tap after the position is close enough to the

desired point.

Figure 9-55. Stakeout

6. For TS: sight the prism. In the Stake screen, tap the button
to measure the target. Once the position is close enough to the
desired point, tap to store it.

Figure 9-56. Stakeout

• The Set References option from the pop-up menu in the top left
corner of the Stake screen allows selecting references, surfaces or

P/N 7010-0945 9-41

SSF_UM_um.book Page 42 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

segment points, for additional reporting options. For details on

the Set References option, see page 9-35.
• Use the Initial Point Name to set the name of the first point and a
value for increment/decrement of names of points calculated for
the stakeout task (see Figure 9-51 on page 9-38).

Stakeout DTM
1. To stake out points inside of a digital terrain model, tap
Stake DTM.
2. On the DTM Stk screen (Figure 9-57):
• Tap the button to select a TN3 file containing the desired
DTM.

Figure 9-57. Select DTM

• Set the height and the type of the antenna height (GPS mode), or
the height of the rod (target) (TS mode).
• Check and enable the Use Alignment box to use station and offset
information while staking the DTM, check and enable the Create
TIN box to generate a new TIN (TN3) Cut/Sheet model of the
points staked.

9-42 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 43 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout DTM

• Tap Stake. When opening the DTM file selected, SSF displays a
warning about the minimum and maximum values of coordinates
in the area covered by the DTM. A stakeout point must be located
on the inside of the DTM. If a stakeout point is located on the
outside of the DTM for the job, SSF neither calculates nor writes
the coordinates of this point. Tap Close to open the Stake screen.
3. For GPS+: use the information on the Stake screen for finding
the target. Tap after the position is close enough to the
desired point (Figure 9-58 on page 9-43).

Figure 9-58. GPS Stakeout

4. For TS: sight the prism. On the Stakeout screen, tap the
button to measure the target. Use the EDM button to select

P/N 7010-0945 9-43

SSF_UM_um.book Page 44 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

distance measurement mode. Once the position is close enough

to the desired one, tap to store it.

Figure 9-59. TS Stakeout

Stakeout Linework
1. To stake out points with code strings, tap Stake Linework.

Figure 9-60. Linework

2. On the Linework screen, select Code or Linework to use one

of two linework selections:

9-44 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 45 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Stakeout Linework

• Code allows linework selection by CodeString (Figure 9-60).

Figure 9-61. Linework Selected by Code

• Linework allows linework selection from the job lineworks

(listed in the dialog) or a polyline selected from the Map.

Figure 9-62. Linework Selection

If the line is a background line, copy the line to the job, update the
list of lineworks and select it in the list.
3. Specify the antenna parameters: the height value and type, or
the height of the rod, based on whether in GPS+ mode or TS
mode. Tap Next.
4. On the Station & Offsets screen, set offsets for stakeout.

P/N 7010-0945 9-45

SSF_UM_um.book Page 46 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

• Select stakeout mode: in real time or by station interval.

• Set offsets of the stkeout point with respect to the line at the
station.
• Select the stake location when stakeout to an angle point:
– Offset Bk: the stake location will be on the (back) segment
before the angle point.
– Offset Ahd: the stake location will be on the (ahead) segment
after the angle point.
– Bisector: when bisector is selected, the proposed stake
location will be on the bisectrix of the angle at the computed
offset from the angle point.
• Select the stake location when stakeout to a curve point:
– Offset: the stake location will be on the curve at the offset
distance from the curve point.
– RP: the radius point.
– PI: the point of intersection of tangents to the curve drawn at
the start and end curve points.
– MOC: the point in the middle of the curve.
• Tap Stake to start stakeout process.

Figure 9-63. Station Stakeout

9-46 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 47 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Level Stakeout

Level Stakeout
The Level Stakeout process involves finding elevations of points
close to a desired elevation.
Digital Level Stakeout of design points, and elevations can be
accessed from the main menu for a Level survey type or from the top
left menu in the Level Run screen.

DL Staking a Point
1. To stake out elevations of design points, tap Stake Points.
The Stake screen displays.
2. On the Stake screen (Figure 9-64 on page 9-47), enter or select
from the map or list the backsight point for the stake
measurement and a design point to stake.
3. Tap the BS button to take the BS measurement before staking if
it is not already measured. Tap the Stakeout button.

Figure 9-64. DL Stake Point

4. On the level Stakeout screen, tap the Meas button to measure

the elevation and compute a cut/fill value. Tap Store to set a
code for the point, the name, and a photo note; set the layer
name and plotting parameters, to view the point information
and save the staked point (Figure 9-65).

P/N 7010-0945 9-47

SSF_UM_um.book Page 48 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Staked points are not added to the Level Run; they are
independent. Staked out points are listed as observed points on
the Points screen.

Figure 9-65. DL Stakeout

DL Staking Point List

1. To stake out elevations at design points in a point list, tap
Stake Point List. The Stake Point List screen displays
(Figure 9-66).
2. On the Stake Point List screen, select a pre-existing points list,
enter either manually or select from the map or the list the
backsight point for the stake measurement.

9-48 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 49 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Level Stakeout

Figure 9-66. DL Stake Point List

To perform a stakeout starting from the end of the Point List,

check and enable the Stakeout in Reverse Order box. Use the
arrow buttons to modify the order of stakeout. Tap the BS button
to take the BS measurement before staking if it is not already
measured. Then tap Stakeout.

DL Staking Elevation
1. To stake out elevations, tap Stake Elevation. The Stakeout
Elev screen displays (Figure 9-67 on page 9-50).
2. On the Stakeout Elev screen, enter or select from the map or
list, the backsight point for the stake measurement and enter an
elevation value to stake at points.

P/N 7010-0945 9-49

SSF_UM_um.book Page 50 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Staking Out

Tap the BS button to take the BS measurement before staking if

it is not already measured. Then tap Stakeout.

Figure 9-67. DL Stakeout Elevation

3. On the level Stakeout screen (Figure 9-68) tap the Meas button
to measure the elevation and compute a cut/fill value. Tap
Store to set a code for the point, the name, a photo note and the
layer name and plotting parameters. You can also view the
elevation information and save the staked point.

Figure 9-68. Level Stakeout

9-50 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Chapter 10

COGO
The COGO functionality in SSF is a comprehensive set of COGO
tools to calculate the coordinate geometry to solve the geometry
problems encountered in professional surveying and civil engineering
applications. For example, use COGO tools, including Inverse,
Intersection, Traverse, Curve Solutions to design the precise points of
boundaries, buildings, or other elements included in a project. A
built-in calculator will help to edit input values in the entry fields of
all dialog boxes.

Tap the COGO icon to access the COGO menu.

The icon in the upper-left corner of every COGO

screen displays graphically the task being
TIP T
performed. Tap this bitmap to open the greater map.
Tap the screen area to hide it.

Inverse
Three inverse tasks available in the Inverse menu are based on
computing the azimuth and distance between two points, given their
coordinates.

Two-Point Inverse
The Point-to-Point Inverse task computes the inverse (azimuth and
distance) between two known points.
1. Select the points for the task from map or from the list
(Figure 10-1 on page 10-2).

P/N 7010-0945 10-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

2. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will be

displayed on the Results tab. The Map tab shows the results
graphically.

Figure 10-1. Two-Point Inverse

Inverse Point to Points List

The Inverse Pt to Pt List task calculates the inverse for all the points
in the Points list with respect to a known point.
1. On the Inverse Pt to Pt List screen (Figure 10-2), select a point
and a point list (Figure 10-2).

Figure 10-2. Inverse Point to Point List

10-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Inverse

2. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab. The Map tab shows the results graphically.

Inverse Point to Line

The Inverse Point to Line task calculates the horizontal offset of a
point with respect to a known line. The station along the line, where
the perpendicular passes though the point, and the height at this
station are also computed.
1. On Inverse Point to Line screen (Figure 10-3), select the point
name, and set the line by its start point, azimuth, and starting
station (Figure 10-3).

Figure 10-3. Inverse Point to Line.

2. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab. The Map tab shows the results graphically.

P/N 7010-0945 10-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Point in Direction
The Point in Direction task calculates the coordinates of a point,
using a known point, and angle and distance offsets from it.
1. On the Point in Direction screen (Figure 10-4) enter the From
point name (known point), the azimuth set by value or as the
direction to another known point.
Set the angle offset from the azimuth line, the distance offset
along the angle offset line and the height offset. Also select a
name and a code for the resulting point (in the direction
specified by azimuth and angle offset).

Figure 10-4. Point in Direction

To edit angles, azimuths, and distances etc., use the

entry fields to add/subtract angle and linear values,
T
directly or use the Calculator. Start the calculator
TIP

from this field by pressing the F1 button on the

controller keyboard, or by tapping the Calculator
button on the pop-up keyboard for controllers with
soft input panels.

2. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab. The Save button in the Results page should
be tapped to save the checked point. The Map tab shows the
results graphically.

10-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Intersection

Intersection
The Intersection task computes the intersection point or points when
given two known points and either the direction or distance from the
known points.
1. On the Intersection screen (Figure 10-5), select the points for
the task from map or from the list.

Figure 10-5. Intersection

2. By tapping the Distance/Azimuth/Az to Pt button in the

corresponding fields, select the parameter for to use and input
its value.
3. Enter the name and code of the first resulting intersection point.
4. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab. The Save button in the Results page should
be tapped to save the checked points. The Map tab shows the
results graphically.
5. If Distance is specified for any known point in the Intersection
tab, there will be two solutions for the Intersection calculation

P/N 7010-0945 10-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Calculator
A built-in calculator in SSF performs calculations and conversions.
To access the calculator, tap the Calculator icon (Figure 10-6).

Figure 10-6. Calculator

To enter a calculated value to any entry field in

SSF, either press the F1 button on the controller
T
keyboard to start the calculator from this field or tap
TIP

the Calculator icon on the pop-up keyboard for

controllers with soft input panels.

1. Enter the entire equation in the Input field, then press the
equals [=] button to calculate the result.
2. The Result field shows calculation results. This field is also
used as the ‘y’ or ‘theta’ values for rectangular / polar
conversions.
3. Once equals is pressed, the previous result is moved up to the
Previous Result field. This field is also used as the ‘x’ or ‘r’
values for rectangular/polar conversions.
4. To perform calculations, use the following buttons:
• MC – tap to clear the memory.
• MR – tap to recall the memory value, indicated by M in the
Input field.

10-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Curve Solutions

• MS – tap to save the already computed result into memory.

• M+ – tap to add the already computed result to the value in
memory.
• C – tap to clear all fields.
• backspace (<-) – to remove the last entry.
• copy – tap to close the calculator, in case it was started from
the COGO menu or to copy calculation results to that field if
the calculator was started from a field in SSF.
• sci – tap to display/use the scientific calculator (Figure 10-7).

Figure 10-7. Scientific Calculator

Curve Solutions
A curve is a part of a circle and thus can be described through the
center point (also called a Radius Point), the radius value and the
starting and ending points on the circle, also called a PC (Point of
Curvature) and a PT (Point of Tangency).
Using these values can help you find other curve parameters. For
detailed explanations on the different curve parameters, refer to the
SSF Reference Manual.

P/N 7010-0945 10-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Curve
The Curve COGO task calculates the full set of parameters for any
curve, given one each, of the length and curvature parameters.
1. On the Curve Solution screen, select the curvature parameters
of the curve (Radius, Deg Chord, or Deg Curve) and the length
parameter of the curve (Length, Chord, Tangent, Mid Ord,
External or Delta), and the turn direction (Figure 10-8).

Figure 10-8. Curve Solution.

2. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab.
The Map tab shows the results graphically.

PI & Tangents
The PI & Tangents task computes the PC point, the PT point, and the
center (Radius Point) of a curve, given the Point of Intersection (PI),
the radius, and the azimuths from the PI point to the PC and PT points
respectively. On the PI & Tangents screen, do the following
(Figure 10-9 on page 10-9):
1. Select the initial data for the task and the names and codes for
the result points (Figure 10-9).
2. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab.

10-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Curve Solutions

Figure 10-9. PI & Tangents

3. Tap the Save button in the Results page to save the checked
points.
The Map tab shows the results graphically.

Three Pt Curve
The Three Pt Curve task defines the curve using three points: the PC
and PT points, and either the RP point, or any point on the curve. If
the curve point is defined, then the RP Point will be computed, and
can be saved.
1. On the Three Pt Curve screen, select the initial data for the
task. The screen changes its appearance, depending upon the
first point chosen
(Figure 10-10 on page 10-10).
2. Select the name and code for the RP point, if applicable.
3. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab.
4. Tap the Save button in the Results page to save the checked
point. The Map tab shows the results graphically.

P/N 7010-0945 10-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Figure 10-10. Three Pt Curve

Radius & Points

The Radius & Points task defines a curve using the PC and PT points
and a radius parameter, and computes the RP point coordinates.
1. On the Radius and Points screen (Figure 10-11 on page 10-
11), select the initial data for the task: the curve points, the
radius parameter, the direction of turn and whether the smaller
(less than 180 degrees) or the larger curve (more than 180
degrees) between the curve points is to be considered. Also,
enter the resulting RP point name and code.
2. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab.
3. Tap the Save button in the Results tab to save the checked
point.
The Map tab shows the results graphically.

10-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Area

Figure 10-11. Radius & Points

Area
The Area task calculates the area of a polygon formed by any points
(By Points task), or the coordinates of a point (Hinge task)/points
(Line task) that, after being added to Point List/Linework/Area, form
a polygon of the desired area.

By Points
The By Points task calculates the area of a polygon.
1. On the Comp Area screen (Figure 10-12 on page 10-12), select
a PointList/or Linework/or Area that contains the points
constituting the vertices of the polygon. Use the arrow buttons
to change the order of the points (and thus the shape of the
polygon).
2. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab.
The Map tab shows the results graphically.

P/N 7010-0945 10-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Figure 10-12. By Points

Hinge
On the Known Area – Hinge screen (Figure 10-13), the Hinge
method calculates the coordinates of a point that meets the following
conditions:
• The point is located on a known azimuth taken from the first
point of Point List.

10-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Area

• When the point is added to the Point List between the first and the
last points, a polygon of known area is formed.

Figure 10-13. Known Area - Hinge – Area Tab 1

1. Select the a PointList/or Linework/or Area, use the arrow

buttons to change the order, as desired and tap the Next button
(Figure 10-13 on page 10-13).
2. In the second screen under Area tab, select the known rotation
point from the list, the direction of rotation, the known
requested area, and the name and code of the resulting point
(Figure 10-14).

Figure 10-14. Known Area - Hinge – Area Tab 2

P/N 7010-0945 10-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

3. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab.
4. Tap the Save button on the Results tab to save the checked
point.
The Map tab shows the results graphically.

To edit angles, azimuths, and distances etc., use the

entry fields to add/subtract angle and linear values,
T
directly or use the Calculator. Either press the F1
TIP

button on the controller keyboard to start the

calculator from this field or tap the Calculator icon
on the pop-up keyboard for controllers with soft
panels.

Line
On the Known Area – Line screen (Figure 10-15), the Line method
computes the coordinates of two points that satisfy the following
conditions:
• The points are located on known azimuths, taken from the two
known points.
• The azimuth of the line formed by the points is known.

10-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 15 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Area

• Along with two other known points, the points form a

quadrilateral of the known area.

Figure 10-15. Known Area - Line – Area Tab 1

The Area tab (Figure 10-15) contains the initial data of the Line task.
See “Hinge” on page 10-12 for description of this screen.
1. Tap Next to open the second screen of the Area tab (see
Figure 10-16 on page 10-16)
2. On the second Known Area Line screen, select the initial data
for the task: the start and the end points, the azimuths from the
points, the reference azimuth and the known area value, and the
names and codes of the resulting points.
3. Tap the Calc button. The result of the calculation will display
on the Results tab. The Save button in the Results page should
be tapped to save the checked points. The Map tab shows the
results graphically.

P/N 7010-0945 10-15

SSF_UM_um.book Page 16 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Figure 10-16. Known Area - Line – Area Tab 2

Corner Angle
The Corner Angle task calculates the angle formed by the directions
of two points from a middle point (Figure 10-17).

Figure 10-17. Corner Angle

1. Define the angle sides by selecting the start, middle and end
points.
2. Tap Calc to compute the angle. The result of the calculation
will display on the Results tab, and the Map tab graphically.

10-16 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 17 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Offsets

Offsets
The Offsets task calculates the coordinates of points along a line
(Line Offset task), or along a curve (Curve Offset task), or along a
road (Road Offset task).

Line Offset
The Line Offset task calculates the coordinates of points along a line.
The line can be divided either by the number of subdivisions or by the
interval starting from the station specified.
1. Define the line by selecting the start and end point/azimuth of
the line. Select whether to assign the height of the starting point
to all the calculated points, or whether to compute the height
values using through linear height interpolation along the line.
If needed, select the starting station (chainage) and the number
of subdivisions to divide the line. Check Include Transition
Point if the transition point should be included. Tap Next.

Figure 10-18. Line & Offset

2. On the Sta&Ofst screen (Figure 10-19), if needed, set the

starting station, station interval, offsets with respect to the line
at the station, the height offsets or the vertical grade (in
percentage) with respect to the height of the line at the station
and the starting name for the points calculated. Tap Calc.

P/N 7010-0945 10-17

SSF_UM_um.book Page 18 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Figure 10-19. Station & Offsets

Curve Offset
On the Curv & Offset screen, the Curve Offsets task calculates the
coordinates of points along a curve. The curve can be divided either
by the number of subdivisions or by the starting interval from the
station specified.

Figure 10-20. Curve & Offset

1. Define the curve by selecting the starting PC point of the arc,

the radius parameters of the curve, the point of tangency and
the direction of turn, relative to the PC Point.

10-18 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 19 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Offsets

If needed, select the starting station (chainage) and the number

of subdivisions to divide the curve (Figure 10-20). Tap Next.
2. On the Sta&Ofst screen (Figure 10-19 on page 10-18), if
needed, set the starting station, station interval, offsets with
respect to the curve at the station, height offsets or a vertical
grade (in percentage) with respect to the height of the curve at
the station, and the starting name for the points calculated. Tap
Calc to compute and save the calculated points.

Road Offset
On the Road Offset screen (Figure 10-21), the Road Offset task
calculates the coordinates of points along a road. The road can be
divided by the interval starting from the station specified.
1. Select the road/ horizontal / horizontal and vertical alignments
to calculate the offset points. If needed, select the starting
station (chainage). Tap Next.

Figure 10-21. Road Offset

2. On the Sta&Ofst screen (Figure 10-19 on page 10-18), if

needed, set the starting station, station interval, offsets with
respect to the road at the station, height offsets or a vertical
grade (in percentage) with respect to the height of the road at
the station, and the starting name for the points calculated. Tap
Calc to compute and save the calculated points.

P/N 7010-0945 10-19

SSF_UM_um.book Page 20 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Adjust Points
The Adjust function performs transformation of points and includes
four tasks: Rotate, Translate, Scale, 2D Transform and Traverse
Adjustment.

Rotate
The Rotate task rotates the selected points around one specific point.
1. On the Rotate screen, do the following:
• Select the points for the task. In the Select Points field, tap the By
Range button and enter (set) the range of the point names, or
select points for the scaling task on the map or from the list
(Figure 10-22).

Figure 10-22. Rotate

2. Enter the Rotation Point (the point at the center of rotation).

3. Specify whether the rotation angle will be input directly to the
Rotation Angle field, or as a difference between the new and
old azimuths (to the Old Bearing/Azimuth and New Bearing/
Azimuth fields).
4. Tap the Calc button to rotate the selected points.

10-20 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 21 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Adjust Points

Translate
The Translate task moves a group of points together. On the
Translate screen (Figure 10-23), do the following:
1. Select the points for the task. In the Select Points field tap the
By Range button and set the range of points names, or select
points for scaling task on the map or from the list.

Figure 10-23. Translate

2. Set the method of translation using the Translate By field, to

either Coords/Pts or Az,Dist,Ht.
• When the Coords/Pts method is selected, it means that all the
selected points will be moved in the same direction and
distance as between the points (locations), set by the next two
fields: From Pt (From Crd) and To Pt (To Crd). In the first
case, define only the point name. In the second case, the local
coordinates and the height of the location is needed.
• In the Az,Dist,Ht method, all the selected points move in a
specified direction by a specified distance. These parameters
are set through the Bearing (Azimuth), Horiz Dist, and Vert
Dist fields.
• Tap the Calc button to achieve the result.

P/N 7010-0945 10-21

SSF_UM_um.book Page 22 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

NOTICE The limit for translation of points is 20,000 meters.

Scale
The Scale task scales the distances of a range of points relative to a
Base Point. On the Scale screen (Figure 10-24), do the following:
1. Select the points for the task. In the Select Points field, tap the
By Range button and set the range of the points names, or
select points for the scaling task on the map or from the list
(Figure 10-24).

Figure 10-24. Scale

2. Enter the Base Point name.

3. Enter the Scale Factor.
4. Check and enable the Scale Heights box if the height values
should be scaled also.
5. Tap the Calc button to achieve the result.

10-22 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 23 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Adjust Points

2D Transform
The 2D Transform task recomputes the plane coordinates of a set of
points using the transformation parameters defined by pairs of points
known in two systems. On the 2D Transform screen (Figure 10-25),
do the following:

Figure 10-25. 2D Transform

1. Press the Add button to enter pairs of points / plane positions.

for obtaining transformation parameters. The Point Pair Info
screen displays.

Figure 10-26. Point Pair

2. After all necessary pairs are defined, tap Next.

P/N 7010-0945 10-23

SSF_UM_um.book Page 24 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

3. Check the transformation parameters, select points to

transform, either by a range of points, or points from the map/
list, or all points on a layer selected.
4. Tap Calc to perform the two dimensional transformation of
these points (Figure 10-27).

Figure 10-27. 2D Transform Parameters

Traverse Adjustment
Traverse adjustment is performed to provide a mathematically closed
figure and at the same time to get the best estimates for positions of
all the traverse stations.
1. On the first Adjustment screen (Figure 10-28), select initial
data for traverse adjustment: the stations on which the traverse
originates and closes, whether to adjust elevations and
sideshots or not, an Earth curvature value, and a job to store
adjusted traverse stations. Then tap the Next button. The
second Adjustment screen displays (Figure 10-29 on page 10-
25).

10-24 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 25 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Adjust Points

Figure 10-28. Traverse Adjustment

2. On the next Adjustment screen (Figure 10-29 on page 10-25),

select the method of traverse adjustment to apply (check and
enable either Apply Compass Rule or Apply Angle Balance),
and a technique to close the traverse if it is unclosed.

Figure 10-29. Adjustment

3. Press the Adjust button to adjust the traverse. The Adjustment

Results screen opens to display the results.
The traverse points adjusted will be saved in the new job as
calculated points.

P/N 7010-0945 10-25

SSF_UM_um.book Page 26 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Traverse Calculation
This Traverse function is used to calculate Traverse and Sideshot
points, based on horizontal and vertical Offsets, along a direction
defined by an azimuth, or right, left or deflection angles.
On the Traverse Calc screen (Figure 10-30 on page 10-26), select the
initial data for the traverse task and the name and code for the
resulting point (To Point).

Figure 10-30. Traverse Calc

The initial data includes the starting point, the azimuth to the
calculated point, and the horizontal and vertical distance to it. The
azimuth can be entered as is, or it can be computed from the right or
left angles, or deflection entered in this field.
1. Enter Backsight information input with the help of the BS
Point button.
2. To calculate the result point (To Point) without changing the
From Point, tap the SideShot button. The To Point is
incremented to the next new point in the database.
3. To calculate the result point (To Point), tap the Traverse button
to change the From Point to the To Point. The To Point changes
to the next new name in the database.

10-26 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 27 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

DTM Volume

DTM Volume
This COGO task calculates cut/fill data when computing between two
surfaces.
1. On the DTM Volume screen, select two DTM files and tap Calc
(Figure 10-31).

Figure 10-31. DTM Volume

2. Select the Result tab to view the volume data between the
surfaces. To save the report to a file, tap the To File button.

Figure 10-32. Calculate DTM Volume

P/N 7010-0945 10-27

SSF_UM_um.book Page 28 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

COGO

Notes:

10-28 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Appendix A

mmGPS Operations
In the event that a point is lost, the resection operation can measure an
unknown point, based on the measurements of three or more
surrounding points. The self-levelling mechanism may also need to
be measured and the transmitter calibrated to ensure correct grade.
The following operations require that the transmitter and sensor have
already been setup, as seen in “Initializing mmGPS+” on page 8-16

Resection
The resection function measures an unknown transmitter location
using the rover and three or more points.
When performing a resection, use the following guidelines to ensure
accurate measurements of the Rover points:
• Take measurements at 3 or more points around the Base
transmitter in a balanced, symmetrical pattern (not clustered in
one area).
• Have the sensor facing towards the transmitter during each
measurement.
• Angle the sensor between 6° higher or lower than the
transmitter’s beam, not straight on.
1. With the controller and sensor connected, tap Setup Init
mmGPS. The Init mmGPS+ screen displays (Figure A-1 on
page A-2).

P/N 7010-0945 A-1

SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

mmGPS Operations

2. Tap the Position tab, select a transmitter, then tap the Resect
button (Figure A-1 on page A-2). The Resect screen displays
(Figure A-2 on page A-2).

Figure A-1. Select Transmitter

3. Tap the Sensor tab, then tap the Init Sensor button
(Figure A-2).

Figure A-2. Initialize Sensor

4. If Known Trans Horz Pos was enabled, the Known Point

screen displays (Figure A-3 on page A-3). Select the point over
which the transmitter was setup using the map or list icons and
tap the ok button.

A-2 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 3 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Resection

Map Icon List Icon

Figure A-3. Transmitter Over Known Point

When the sensor is successfully initialized, SSF displays the

setup successful screen. Tap Close to continue.
5. Tap the Resect tab (Figure A-4).
• If using an unknown point, tap Start.
• If using a known point, check and enable the Known Point
box and select a point to occupy by tapping the map or list
icons and enter the antenna’s height. Then tap Start.

Figure A-4. Use Unknown or Known Point

P/N 7010-0945 A-3

SSF_UM_um.book Page 4 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

mmGPS Operations

When the sensor receives the transmitter’s beam, the mmGPS

icon displays (Figure A-4 on page A-3).
During the measurement, the Resect tab displays the number of
GPS epochs used in the resection calculation (Figure A-4 on
page A-3).
6. When the desired amount of time has passed, tap the Stop
button.
7. Move to the next point and repeat steps 4 and 5 for three or
more points.
8. Tap the Data tab to view the results (Figure A-5 on page A-4).
• Only after three or more points have been measured will data
display. The first two points will not display any data.
• Tap the Re-Meas button to clear all data and restart he
resection process (Figure A-5 on page A-4).

Figure A-5. Resection Data Results

9. If the resection values are acceptable, tap the Accept button

(Figure A-5) and view the point information for the transmitter
(Figure A-6) on the Add Point screen.
10. Tap the ok button to save the transmitter’s point
information.
• Enter any other desired information (such as, codes or notes).

A-4 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 5 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Resection

• If the transmitter is over a control point, check and enable

Control Point box.

Figure A-6. View Point Information

11. After the resection (Figure A-7), initialize the sensor. See
“Sensor Initialization” on page 8-18 for details.

Figure A-7. Initialize Sensor after Resection

After performing a resection, check the results using the Known Point
Offset function. This function also provides an option to adjust the
transmitter’s height using the new offset.

P/N 7010-0945 A-5

SSF_UM_um.book Page 6 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

mmGPS Operations

1. On the Init mmGPS+ screen, tap the bitmap menu in the

upper-left corner of the screen and select Known Point Offset
(Figure A-8).

Figure A-8. Open Known Point Offset

2. Select the Rover’s known point using the map or list icons,
then tap Start (Figure A-9).

Figure A-9. Select Rover’s Point and Begin Averaging

A-6 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 7 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Resection

When the averaging completes, the screen displays the height

offset for the transmitter’s height (Figure A-10).

Figure A-10. Transmitter’s Height Offset Averaged

3. Tap the ok button, then tap Yes at the Warning! screen to

adjust the transmitter height using the results (Figure A-11 on
page A-7). The offset will be automatically added to the
transmitter’s height.

Figure A-11. Adjust Transmitter’s Height

4. When finished, initialize the sensor. See “Sensor Initialization”

on page 8-18 for details.

P/N 7010-0945 A-7

SSF_UM_um.book Page 8 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

mmGPS Operations

Field Calibration
The field calibration function fixes incline error in the self-leveling
mechanism of the transmitter.
1. At the transmitter, hold the plumb beam key, then tap and
release the power key to put the transmitter into calibration
mode.
2. With the rover, walk over 30 meters away from the transmitter
and face the sensor towards the transmitter.

Use a bi-pole to ensure the sensor remains steady

TIP T throughout the calibration process.

3. With the controller and sensor connected, tap Setup GPS Init
mmGPS. The Init mmGPS+ screen displays (Figure A-12 on
page A-8).
4. On the Init mmGPS+ screen, tap the Help Icon menu in the
upper-left corner of the screen and select Field Calibration
(Figure A-12). The Calibration screen displays (Figure A-13).

Figure A-12. Open Field Calibration

A-8 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 9 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Field Calibration

5. On the Calibration screen, select the transmitter that will be

calibrated from the Transmitter Name drop-down list and tap
Next (Figure A-13).

Figure A-13. Select Transmitter to Calibrate

6. Adjust the height of the sensor so the angle is less than 1°. Once
the Angle is OK, tap Next (Figure A-14 on page A-9).

Figure A-14. Check Angle of Sensor

If the sensor experiences excessive movement

NOTICE during any stage of the calibration, an error
message will display. Tap Close.

P/N 7010-0945 A-9

SSF_UM_um.book Page 10 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

mmGPS Operations

7. Tap Calibrate after the auto-levelling process completes

(Figure A-15).

Figure A-15. Begin Field Calibration

8. Turn the transmitter 180° so the back faces the transmitter. Tap
Calibrate (Figure A-16 on page A-10).

Figure A-16. Turn Transmitter to Back and Collect Data

A-10 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 11 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

Field Calibration

9. Turn the transmitter 90° so the left side faces the transmitter.
Tap Calibrate (Figure A-17).

Figure A-17. Turn Transmitter to Left and Collect Data

10. Turn the transmitter 180° so the right side faces the transmitter.
Tap Calibrate (Figure A-18 on page A-11).

Figure A-18. Turn Transmitter to Right and Collect Data

When the calibration completes, the Update Calib Data screen

displays the offsets (Figure A-19 on page A-12).
If the offsets were outside the tolerance range, SSF will indicate
that the transmitter needs to be updated (Figure A-19 on page A-
12).

P/N 7010-0945 A-11

SSF_UM_um.book Page 12 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

mmGPS Operations

11. Disconnect the controller and sensor. At the transmitter,

connect the controller and transmitter.
12. On the Update Calib Data screen, select the Com Port that
connects the controller and transmitter and tap the Update
Data button (Figure A-19 on page A-12).

Figure A-19. Field Calibration Results

SSF uploads the calibration data to the transmitter and

automatically turns off the transmitter.
13. When finished, tap Close on the Message screen (Figure A-20).

Figure A-20. Uploading Calibration Data

A-12 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 13 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

mmGPS Options

14. Initialize the sensor according to “Sensor Initialization” on

page 8-18.

After loading the new calibration data into the

transmitter, re-calibrate to check the system. The
T
transmitter may need to be calibrated a couple of
TIP

times depending on site conditions.

mmGPS Options
When configured for mmGPS, an options menu selection provides
further functionality for applying height differences and selecting
whether or not to use mmGPS and weighted height computations.
1. On the Status screen (Setup Status), tap the bitmap menu in
the upper-left corner of the screen, and select mmGPS+
Options (Figure A-21). The mmGPS+ Opts screen displays.

Figure A-21. mmGPS+ Options

2. On the mmGPS+ Opts screen (Figure A-22 on page A-14),

select the following options:
• Select Turn mmGPS+ ON or OFF.

P/N 7010-0945 A-13

SSF_UM_um.book Page 14 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

mmGPS Operations

• Use weighted height computations – check and enable to use

weighted height computations
• Height Difference Limit – enter a value here between the
GPS result and the mmGPS result (Figure A-22).

Figure A-22. Select mmGPS+ Options

If the difference between the measured GPS height and the

mmGPS height is greater than the entered value, the mmGPS
icon changes (Figure A-23).

Figure A-23. mmGPS Icon with Height Difference Limit

A-14 Sokkia Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

SSF_UM_um.book Page 1 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM
SSF_UM_um.book Page 2 Friday, December 17, 2010 4:53 PM

ISO 9001:2000
FM 68448

Spectrum Survey Field User’s Manual

P/N: 7010-0945 Rev C 12/10

©2010 Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc.

Concerns regarding this Sokkia product may be sent to Service and Repair Department,
Topcon Positioning Systems, Inc., 7400 National Drive, Livermore, California 94550
All rights reserved. No unauthorized duplication.